Savin Printer 3799 User Guide

Operating Instructions  
<Advanced Features>  
Solving Operation Problems  
Maintaining Your Machine  
Appendix  
For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the  
Basic Features manual before you use it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.  
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully  
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.  
Notes:  
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.  
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.  
Machine Types:  
The model names of the machine do not appear in the following pages. Check the type of your machine  
before reading this manual. (For details, see p.17 “Machine Types”, <Basic Features>.)  
Type1: 3799/F9199/LF510/5510L  
Type2: 3799nf/F9199nf/LF515e/5510NF  
Notes:  
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.  
Important  
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. In no event will the company be li-  
able for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages as a result of handling or oper-  
ating the machine.  
Power Source:  
AC120 V, 60 Hz  
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,  
see p.284 “Connecting the Power and Switching On”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
a means POWER ON.  
b means POWER OFF.  
Copyright © 2002  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Features ...........................................................................................................3  
Reduced Image Transmission............................................................................26  
Searching Memory for Received Faxes...................................................................62  
Disk File Search List/Visual List...............................................................................65  
Printing Files ............................................................................................................65  
Deleting Files ...........................................................................................................66  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing Messages in Information Boxes...................................................................69  
Telephone Directory.................................................................................................76  
Auto Reduction.........................................................................................................93  
Duplex Original Settings...........................................................................................94  
Batch Original Documents Transmission.................................................................96  
If Memory Runs out While Scanning Is in Progress ..............................................97  
Inserting a Label Using Auto Document................................................................98  
No Document, No Dial ...........................................................................................100  
Checking the Transmission Result.........................................................................103  
Simultaneous Broadcast ........................................................................................104  
Broadcasting: Checking Progress..........................................................................104  
Batch Transmission................................................................................................105  
Dual Access ...........................................................................................................105  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) ................................................................................105  
Parallel Memory Transmission...............................................................................105  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ........................................107  
Transfer Result Report ........................................................................................115  
Remote Transfer ....................................................................................................116  
Center Mark ...........................................................................................................120  
Multi-copy Reception..............................................................................................120  
Two In One.............................................................................................................121  
Rotate Sort.............................................................................................................122  
TSI Print .................................................................................................................123  
Adjusting the Printing Density ................................................................................124  
Output density .....................................................................................................124  
Toner saving........................................................................................................124  
When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size...................................................125  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Keystroke Program.................................................................................142  
Printing the Fax On Demand List...........................................................................165  
Checking the Fax On Demand Recorded Messages ..........................................168  
How Callers Use Fax On Demand ......................................................................169  
When the Password Is Turned On ......................................................................170  
When the Password Is Turned Off ......................................................................170  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Night Timer.............................................................................................................176  
How to Set User Parameters...............................................................................188  
G3 Analog Line ......................................................................................................189  
G4 Digital Line........................................................................................................194  
Registering ID Codes.............................................................................................199  
File Retention.........................................................................................................201  
Network Settings....................................................................................................204  
System Parameter Transmission...........................................................................204  
Print Position..........................................................................................................206  
Multi-copy Reception.........................(Printing Multiple Copies of Messages  
Setting up Multi-copy Reception..........................................................................214  
Printing the Specified Sender List .......................................................................217  
Setting up Authorized Reception.........................................................................218  
Printing the Specified Sender List .......................................................................220  
Printed on Different Paper) .........................220  
Deleting Specified Senders .................................................................................223  
Forwarding ........................................(Having Messages From Certain Senders  
Setting up Forwarding .........................................................................................225  
Deleting Forwarding Addresses ..........................................................................228  
Deleting Specified Senders (Forwarding)............................................................229  
Printing the Specified Sender List (Forwarding)..................................................231  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stored in Memory Instead of Being  
Setting up Memory Lock......................................................................................234  
Printing the Specified Sender List .......................................................................236  
Stored in Memory) ......................................236  
Setting up TX/RX File Save.................................................................................237  
Deleting Specified Senders .................................................................................239  
Deleting Specified Senders...............(General Procedure for Deleting Specified  
How to Delete Specified Senders........................................................................239  
Printing the Specified Sender List..... (General Procedure for Printing a List of  
Personal Boxes......................................................................................................246  
Deleting Personal Boxes........................................................................................250  
Registering/Editing Information Boxes...................................................................251  
Registering/Editing Transfer Boxes........................................................................255  
Reading Reports ................................................................................................264  
Error Report ...........................................................................................................264  
Power Failure Report .............................................................................................264  
Error Codes ........................................................................................................265  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Document Transport Mechanism......................................................275  
Optional Paper Tray Unit.....................................................................................277  
Fax On Demand Unit .............................................................................................291  
Handset..................................................................................................................292  
NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1) ...........................................................................292  
Printer Interface Unit ..............................................................................................293  
Other Options.........................................................................................................293  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Acceptable Original Sizes....................................................................................296  
Paper......................................................................................................................298  
Non-recommended Paper ...................................................................................299  
Introduction..........................................................................................................300  
Selecting the Energy Saver Mode type ...............................................................302  
Reception in Energy Saver Mode........................................................................302  
Maximum Values................................................................................................303  
INDEX....................................................................................................... 304  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Read this Manual  
The following set of symbols is used in this manual.  
R WARNING:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in  
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-  
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-  
scribed in the Safety Information section in the Basic Features manual.  
R CAUTION:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-  
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury  
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this  
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety  
Information section in the Basic Features manual.  
* The statements above are notes for your safety.  
Important  
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be  
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.  
Preparation  
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.  
Note  
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnor-  
mal operation.  
Limitation  
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,  
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.  
Reference  
This symbol indicates a reference.  
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's panel display.  
{
}
Keys built into the control panel of the machine.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Mark  
Paper Directions are shown as following on this book.  
Original is  
placed  
this way  
Tray is  
pulled out  
this way  
Tray is  
pulled out  
this way  
Original is  
placed  
this way  
GFKAMI0N  
Portrait direction towards originals set direction is shown as K, and landscape  
direction towards original set direction is shown as L.  
Portrait direction on the paper tray is shown as K, and landscape direction on  
the paper tray is shown as L.  
Note  
represents original or paper.  
Reference  
For "Auto Document Feeder (ADF)", see p.18 “Guide to Components”, <Basic  
Features>.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manuals for This Machine  
Two Facsimile Reference manuals are provided, the Basic Features manual and  
the Advanced Features manual. For Type 2 machines and Type 1 machines with  
options, NIC FAX Unit manual and NIC FAX Unit CD-ROM manual are also  
provided. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs.  
Instructions for the optional ISDN Unit (ISDN G4 Interface Unit Type510) and the Extra G3 In-  
terface Unit (G3 Interface Unit Type510) are included in the Basic Features and Advanced Fea-  
tures manuals.  
Advanced Features (This Manual)  
The Advanced Features manual describes more advanced functions, and also  
explains settings for key operators.  
Basic Features  
The Basic Features manual explains the most frequently used fax functions and  
operations.  
Chapter 1 Getting Started  
Describes part names of the machine and control panel. Also lists symbols  
and conventions used in this manual.  
Chapter 2 Faxing  
Explains basic transmission. You can also find out about other types of trans-  
missions and how to switch the reception mode.  
Chapter 3 Programming  
Explains how to make initial settings, such as the Own Name and Own Fax  
Number settings. Also explains the Quick Dial, Speed Dial and Group keys.  
These functions allow you to store numbers and save time when dialing. This  
chapter also explains how to enter letters and symbols.  
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting  
Explains clearing document jams, loading paper and changing the volume of  
audible signals generated by the machine. When the display or indicator  
lights show unusual information, check the list and take appropriate action.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NIC FAX Unit Manual (on CD-ROM) (Option for Type1)  
The NIC Fax Unit manual explains about the Internet Fax function, IP-Fax func-  
tion, LAN FAX function and Scanner function.  
Chapter 1 Getting Started  
Explains names and functions for the control panel and necessary settings.  
Software on the CD-ROM and how to install it are also explained.  
Chapter 2 Using Internet Fax Functions  
Explains the Internet Fax function. You can send and receive documents by e-  
mail using the Internet.  
Chapter 3 Using IP-Fax Functions  
Explains the IP-Fax function. You can send and receive documents between  
fax machines that are connected to the network using TCP/IP.  
Chapter 4 Using LAN FAX Functions  
Explains the LAN Fax function. You can send documents that are created us-  
ing computer applications. Editing the destinations in the Address Book that  
are used when sending by LAN Fax is also explained.  
Chapter 5 Using Scanner Functions  
Explains sending scanned data as an image file attached to e-mail. The Net-  
work Delivery Scanner is also explained. You can deliver scanned data using  
the delivery server.  
Chapter 6 Registering Addresses  
Explains how to register the destinations for Internet Fax, IP-Fax and Scanner  
using Quick Dial and Speed Dial. How to register an Address Template often  
used when specifying destinations is also explained.  
Chapter 7 Making Settings through a Web Browser  
Explains the items you can check and set using a Web browser on a Network  
computer. The Help function is also explained.  
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting  
Explains error messages and user parameter settings. When the display  
shows unusual information, check the list in this chapter and take the appro-  
priate action.  
Chapter 9 Appendix  
Explains important reports and lists that are printed when using Internet Fax  
function or PC FAX function. Specifications are also in this chapter.  
NIC FAX Unit CD-ROM Manual (Option for Type1)  
Introduces the contents of the NIC FAX CD-ROM and the necessary operating  
environment for the CD-ROM.  
How to access the NIC FAX unit manual in PDF format on the CD-ROM is also  
explained.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. Transmission Mode  
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)  
Using the Send Later function, you  
B Press [Mode].  
can delay transmission of your fax  
message until a specified time. This  
allows you to take advantage of off-  
peak telephone line charges without  
having to be by the machine at the  
time of transmission.  
Transmitter  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
Receiver  
C Enter the code for "Send Later"  
with the number keys.  
Send Later  
at 21:00(9:00PM)  
GFTIME0N  
Important  
If the Power switch is off for 12  
hours or longer, all the stored mes-  
sages are deleted.  
D Enter the time with the number  
keys. To change AM/PM, press  
[AM/PM] or press [Economy TX].  
Limitation  
This feature is not available with  
Immediate Transmission. Specify  
Memory Transmission before-  
hand.  
Note  
If the current time shown on the  
display is not correct, adjust it.  
See p.151 Date/Time.  
Note  
You cannot specify a time more  
The current time appears on the  
If you wish to use Economy Trans-  
mission, program the time when  
your phone charges get cheaper.  
See p.175 Economy Transmis-  
sion.  
right side of the display.  
When entering numbers small-  
er than 10, add a leading zero.  
If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear} key or {Stop} key and  
try again.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transmission Mode  
E Press [OK].  
1
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown on the display. A check  
mark is added to Send Later.  
Note  
To cancel Send Later, press  
[Cancel] and the display will re-  
turn to the Transmission Mode  
menu.  
F Press [Exit].  
The standby display is shown.  
Note  
"Send Later" is shown on the  
display. If you set up other  
transmission mode functions  
(except Polling Reception),  
"Others" is displayed.  
G Dial, and then press the {Start}  
key.  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Send Later.  
See p.35 Canceling a Transmis-  
sion or Reception.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Confidential Messages  
Sending Confidential Messages  
This feature is called Confidential  
Transmission. Use this feature if you  
do not want your message to be  
picked up casually by anybody at the  
other end. The message will be stored  
in the memory at the other end. It will  
not be printed until the Confidential  
ID is entered.  
Limitation  
The destination machine must be  
of the same make and have the  
Confidential Reception feature.  
1
Note  
We recommend that you program  
the Confidential ID beforehand.  
See p.199 Registering ID Codes.  
An ID can be any 4 digit number  
except 0000.  
Transmitter  
The destination machine must  
Receiver  
have enough memory available.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
Entering the Confidential ID  
B Press [Mode].  
GFSINS0N  
There are two types of Confidential  
Transmission:  
Default ID  
The other party can print the mes-  
sage by entering the ID that was  
previously stored in the other par-  
ty's terminal using the Confiden-  
tial ID feature.  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
ID Override  
C Enter the code for "Confidential  
If you wish to send a confidential  
message to a particular person at  
the other end, you can specify the  
Confidential ID that person has to  
enter to see that message. Any-  
body entering the machine's Confi-  
dential ID will not be able to see  
the message. Before you send the  
message, do not forget to tell the  
intended receiver what code must  
be entered to print the message.  
TX" with the number keys.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission Mode  
B Enter the Confidential ID (4-  
digit number) with the number  
key.  
D Depending on the Confidential  
Transmission type, use one of the  
following procedures:  
1
Default ID  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "De-  
fault ID".  
C Press [OK].  
The Transmission Mode menu  
is shown again. A check mark is  
added to Confidential TX.  
Note  
To cancel the Confidential  
Transmission, press [Cancel].  
The Transmission Mode  
menu is shown on the dis-  
play.  
B Press [OK].  
The Transmission Mode menu  
is shown again. A check mark is  
added to Confidential TX.  
E Press [Exit].  
Note  
To cancel the Confidential  
Transmission, press [Cancel].  
The Transmission Mode  
menu is shown on the dis-  
play.  
The standby display is shown.  
ID Override  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "ID  
Override".  
Note  
"Conf. TX" is shown on the dis-  
play. If you set up other trans-  
mission mode functions (except  
Polling Reception), "Others" is  
displayed.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Confidential Messages  
F Dial, and then press the {Start}  
key.  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Confiden-  
tial Transmission. See p.35  
Canceling a Transmission or  
Reception.  
1
-Sending confidential faxes to  
other makers' machines  
Confidential Transmission is only  
possible with machines of the same  
make that have the Confidential  
Transmission feature. However, if  
can send and receive confidential fax-  
es to and from other makers' ma-  
chines that have the SUB/SID feature.  
See p.13 SUB Code Transmission  
with the Mode Key.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
User Code Transmission  
User Codes allow you to keep track of  
B Press [Mode].  
machine usage. If everyone uses a  
User Code when they use the fax ma-  
chine, the codes or the names pro-  
grammed for the codes will be  
printed in the Journal and other re-  
ports. This will help you to check who  
has been using the machine and how  
often.  
1
Preparation  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
Personal Box for each user before-  
hand. The SUB code you specify  
will become the user's User Code.  
See p.247 Registering/Editing  
Personal Boxes.  
C Enter the code for "User Code"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
User Codes (the name of the Per-  
sonal Box) can be printed on the  
fax, lists or reports printed at the  
other end.  
D Enter a User Code/SUB Code (up  
to 20 digits) with the number  
keys.  
When the user's name is registered  
into a User Code, and the Label In-  
sertion function is assigned to ei-  
ther a Quick Dial key or Speed  
Dial, you can have the receiver's  
key or Speed Dial and the user's  
name printed on the message  
when it is received at the other  
end. See p.98 Label Insertion.  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or {Stop}  
key and try again.  
Instead of the Fax Header, you can  
choose the user's name (the name  
at the same position on the mes-  
sage. You can turn this function on  
or off with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
20 bit 5).  
To enter a User Code with a  
Quick Dial key  
A Press the Quick Dial key the  
User Code has been assigned to.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Code Transmission  
B Press [Yes].  
F Press [Exit].  
1
Proceed to step G.  
The User Code screen appears.  
E Press [OK].  
Note  
"User Code" is shown on the  
display. If you set up other  
transmission mode functions  
(except Polling Reception),  
"Others" is displayed.  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown again. A check mark is add-  
ed to "User Code".  
G Dial, and then press the {Start}  
key.  
Note  
When an unregistered User  
Code is entered, the following  
message appears: "Not pro-  
grammed." then the display in  
step D will reappear.  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Personal  
Transmission. See p.35 Cancel-  
ing a Transmission or Recep-  
tion.  
To cancel the User Code Trans-  
mission, press [Cancel]. The  
Transmission Mode menu is  
shown on the display.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
D Dial, and then press the {Start}  
Entering a User Code with a  
Quick Dial Key  
key.  
When a SUB Code (User Code) for a  
Personal Box has been assigned to a  
Quick Dial key, you can perform User  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Personal  
Transmission. See p.35 Cancel-  
ing a Transmission or Recep-  
tion.  
1
Reference  
p.247 Registering/Editing Per-  
sonal Boxes”  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Press the Quick Dial key the User  
Code has been assigned to.  
C Press [Yes].  
Note  
"User Code" is shown on the  
display. If you set up other  
transmission mode functions  
(except Polling Reception),  
"Others" is displayed.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SUB Code Transmission with the Mode Key  
SUB Code Transmission with the Mode Key  
Confidential Transmission is only  
D Check the display message, then  
possible with machines of the same  
press [OK].  
1
make that have the Confidential  
Transmission feature. However, if  
you use the SUB/SID function, you  
can send and receive confidential fax-  
es to and from other makers' ma-  
chines that have the SUB/SID feature.  
This feature is used when sending  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
Reference  
p.78 SUB/SID (SUB Code Trans-  
mission)”  
shown again. A check mark is add-  
ed to "TX With SUB/SID".  
E Press [Exit].  
p.246 Personal Boxes”  
p.254 Transfer Boxes”  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Press [Mode].  
Note  
" SUB/SID " is displayed. How-  
ever, if other settings under the  
Mode menu other than Polling  
Reception are selected, "Oth-  
ers" is displayed.  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
F Dial the destination fax number.  
C Enter the code for "TX With  
SUB/SID" with the number keys.  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the  
number, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
Note  
If "TX With SUB/SID" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
                                                      
                                                         
Transmission Mode  
B Enter the SID code.  
G Press [SUB/SID].  
1
Note  
You can enter up to 20 char-  
acters.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q,  
p and spaces. To enter a  
space, press [Space] (the first  
character cannot be a space).  
H Enter the SUB code.  
If you incorrectly enter the  
code, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
Note  
C Press [OK].  
You can enter up to 20 charac-  
I Press [OK].  
ters.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q, p  
and spaces. To enter a space,  
press [Space] (the first character  
cannot be a space).  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or {Stop}  
key and try again.  
When entering the SID  
(Password) is necessary  
If you wish to specify another  
destination  
You may need to enter the SID  
(Password) when sending fax mes-  
sages with the SUB Code Transmis-  
sion function to other makers'  
machines. If a password is set for the  
Transfer Box, enter the SID (Pass-  
word) in addition to SUB code.  
A Press [Add].  
A Press [SID].  
B Repeat steps F to I.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUB Code Transmission with the Mode Key  
J Press the {Start} key.  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for SUB Code  
Transmission. See p.35 Cancel-  
ing a Transmission or Recep-  
tion.  
1
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
SEP Code Polling Reception  
If you wish to receive a message  
C Check the display message, and  
stored in the memory of another par-  
ty's fax machine, use this feature. The  
machine will receive the message  
with the SEP and PWD code that  
then press [OK].  
1
Reference  
p.80 SEP/PWD (SEP Code Poll-  
ing Transmission)”  
p.22 Polling Transmission”  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown again. A check mark is add-  
ed to "RX With SEP/PWD".  
p.251 Information Boxes”  
A Press [Mode].  
D Press [Exit].  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
Note  
"SEP/PWD" is displayed. If you  
set up other transmission mode  
functions (except Polling Recep-  
tion), "Others" is displayed.  
B Enter the code for "RX With  
SEP/PWD" with the number keys.  
E Dial the destination fax number.  
Note  
If "RX With SEP/PWD" is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or [N-  
ext] until it is.  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the  
number, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SEP Code Polling Reception  
A Press [PWD].  
F Press [SEP/PWD].  
1
B Enter the PWD code.  
G Enter the SEP code.  
Note  
Note  
You can enter up to 20 char-  
You can enter up to 20 charac-  
acters.  
ters.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q,  
p and spaces. To enter a  
space, press [Space] (the first  
character cannot be a space).  
You can enter digits 0-9, q, p  
and spaces. To enter a space,  
press [Space] (the first character  
cannot be a space).  
If you incorrectly enter the  
code, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again. The  
{Clear} key deletes one char-  
acter at a time, and the {Stop}  
key deletes the whole line.  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or {Stop}  
key and try again.  
When entering the PWD  
(Password) is necessary  
C Press [OK].  
H Press [OK].  
You may need to enter the PWD  
(Password) when receiving fax  
messages with the SEP Code Poll-  
ing Reception function from other  
makers' machines. However, the  
PWD is not necessary when receiv-  
ing fax messages from a machine  
of the same make.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
                          
Transmission Mode  
If you wish to specify another  
destination  
A Press [Add].  
1
B Repeat steps E to H.  
I Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
You can cancel SUB Code Re-  
ception. See p.35 Canceling a  
Transmission or Reception.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling Reception  
Polling Reception  
Use this function if you wish to poll a  
message from another terminal. You  
can also poll documents from many  
terminals with only one operation  
(use Groups and Keystroke programs  
to fully exploit this feature).  
Limitation  
Polling Reception requires that the  
other machine can perform Polling  
Transmission.  
1
To receive a message sent by any  
Default ID Polling Transmission or  
Override ID Polling Transmission,  
it is necessary to specify the same  
Polling ID as the sender's.  
Receiver  
(This machine)  
Sender  
Transmission  
Request  
To receive a message sent by De-  
fault ID Polling Transmission or  
Override ID Polling Transmission,  
the sender must use a machine of  
the same make that has polling ca-  
pability. With Free Polling Recep-  
tion, a message can be also  
received from other manufactur-  
er's machines as long as they have  
a polling capability.  
GFPOLJ0N  
There are two types of Polling Recep-  
tion.  
Secured Polling Reception  
Note  
If the Polling ID is programmed in  
your machine, any messages wait-  
ing in the transmitting machine  
with the same ID are received. If  
the other machine does not have  
any messages waiting with the  
same Polling ID, any messages that  
do not require an ID are received  
(Free Polling).  
A Polling ID may be any four dig-  
(A to F) except 0000 and FFFF.  
Reference  
p.22 Polling Transmission”  
A Press [Mode].  
Stored ID Override Polling Reception  
You must enter an Override Poll-  
ing ID unique to this transmission.  
This ID overrides the Polling ID.  
Your machine will receive any  
messages waiting in the transmit-  
ting machine with matching IDs. If  
no IDs match, any messages that  
does not require an ID are received  
(Free Polling).  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transmission Mode  
B Enter a Polling ID (4 charac-  
ters) with the number keys and  
Quick Dial keys A–F.  
B Enter the code for "Polling RX"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
1
If you incorrectly enter the  
ID, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
Note  
D Press [OK].  
If "Polling RX" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is.  
C Depending on which method you  
are using, choose one of the fol-  
lowing procedures:  
Secured Polling Reception  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown. A check mark is added to  
Polling Reception.  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "De-  
fault ID".  
Note  
To cancel Polling Reception,  
press [Cancel]. The Transmis-  
sion Mode menu is shown.  
E Press [Exit].  
Stored ID Override Polling  
Reception  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "ID  
Override".  
The following display is shown.  
Note  
"Polling RX" is displayed.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Polling Reception  
F Dial, and then press the {Start}  
File Reserve Report (Polling  
Reception)  
key.  
Note  
You can cancel Polling Recep-  
tion. See p.35 Canceling a  
Transmission or Reception.  
This report is printed after Polling Re-  
ception has been set up.  
Note  
You can turn this function on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 03 bit  
3).  
-Polling Documents from Other  
Manufacturers' Fax Machines  
Standard Polling Reception only  
works with machines of the same  
make that have the Polling Reception  
feature. However, if the other party's  
fax machine supports SEP Transmis-  
Communication Result Report  
(Polling Reception)  
This report is printed after a Polling  
Reception has been completed and  
shows the result of the Polling Recep-  
tion.  
Reference  
Note  
p.80 SEP/PWD (SEP Code Poll-  
ing Transmission)”  
You can also check the result of a  
See p.50 Printing the Journal.  
p.13 SUB Code Transmission  
with the Mode Key”  
You can turn this function on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 03 bit  
4).  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transmission Mode  
Polling Transmission  
Use Polling Transmission when you  
wish to leave a document in the ma-  
chine's memory for others to pick up.  
The message will be sent when the  
other party calls your machine.  
Before using Polling Reception,  
you must store the Polling ID in  
your machine. See p.199 Register-  
ing ID Codes.  
1
Limitation  
Polling Transmission is allowed  
only if the receiver's machine has  
the Polling Reception feature.  
Transmitter  
(This machine)  
Transmission  
Request  
Receiver  
With Free Polling, a message can  
also be sent to other manufactur-  
er's machines as long as they have  
the Polling Reception feature. With  
Default ID and Override ID Poll-  
ing Transmission, a document can  
be sent only to a machine of the  
same make with the Polling Recep-  
tion feature.  
GFPOLS0N  
There are three types of Polling  
Transmission.  
Secured Polling Transmission  
The message will only be sent if the  
Polling ID of the machine trying to  
poll your message is the same as  
the Polling ID stored in your ma-  
chine. Make sure that both ma-  
chines' Polling IDs are identical in  
advance.  
Note  
A Polling ID may be any string of  
four-digit numbers (0 to 9) and  
characters (A to F) except 0000 and  
FFFF.  
Free Polling and Default ID Polling  
Transmission allow only one file to  
be stored in memory each.  
Free Polling Transmission  
Anybody can poll the message  
from your machine. The machine  
sends it regardless of whether Poll-  
ing IDs match.  
Override ID Polling Transmission  
allows a file to be stored in memo-  
ry for each ID; a total of up to 250  
files for varying IDs can be stored.  
The communication fee is charged  
Secured ID Override Polling Trans-  
mission  
to the receiver.  
in memory and are awaiting Poll-  
ing Transmission can be deleted or  
printed out. See p.35 Checking  
and Canceling Transmission  
Files.  
You must enter an Override Polling  
ID unique to this transmission. This  
ID overrides in the Polling ID. The  
user must supply this ID when they  
poll your machine, and if the IDs  
match, the message will be sent.  
Make sure the other party knows  
the ID you are using in advance.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Polling Transmission  
A Set the original and select any  
Free Polling Transmission  
scan settings you require.  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select  
B Press [Mode].  
"Free Poll.".  
1
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
Stored ID Override Polling  
Transmission  
C Enter the code for "Polling TX"  
with the number keys.  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "ID  
Override".  
Note  
If "Polling TX" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is.  
D Depending on the Polling Trans-  
mission type, use one of the fol-  
lowing procedures:  
B Enter the four character Polling  
ID with the number keys and  
Quick Dial keys A-F.  
Secured Polling Transmission  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "De-  
fault ID".  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the  
ID, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transmission Mode  
E Press [SFile] to specify whether to G Press [Exit].  
save the stored original or not.  
1
The standby display is shown.  
Each time you press the key, the  
text at the middle right corner of  
the display switches between  
"Save" and "Use once".  
Note  
Note  
To delete the document imme-  
diately after transmission, select  
"Use once". To repeatedly send  
"Polling TX" is displayed. If you  
set up other transmission mode  
functions (except Polling Recep-  
tion), "Others" is displayed.  
You can set "Use once" or "Save"  
to be shown first on the display  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 11 bit  
7).  
H Press the {Start} key.  
Your document is scanned in.  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Polling  
Transmission. See p.35 Cancel-  
ing a Transmission or Recep-  
tion.  
F Press [OK].  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown. A check mark is added to  
"Polling TX".  
Note  
To cancel the Polling Transmis-  
sion, press [Cancel]. The Trans-  
mission Mode menu is shown.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can also check the result of a  
Polling Transmission with the  
Journal. See p.50 Printing the  
Journal.  
-Polling Documents to Other  
Manufacturers' Fax Machines  
Standard Polling Transmission only  
works with machines of the same  
make that have the Polling Reception  
feature. However, if the other party's  
fax machine supports Polling Recep-  
tion and SEP Transmission, you can  
to them.  
1
p.80 SEP/PWD (SEP Code Poll-  
ing Transmission)”  
p.78 SUB/SID (SUB Code Trans-  
mission)”  
Polling Transmission Clear  
Report  
This report allows you to verify  
whether Polling Transmission has  
taken place.  
Limitation  
This report is not printed if User  
Parameters are set to allow the  
stored documents to be repeatedly  
sent ("Save"). See p.22 Polling  
Transmission.  
Note  
You can turn this function on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 03 bit  
6).  
You can set whether a portion of  
the sent image is printed on the re-  
port with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
04 bit 7).  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission Mode  
Reduced Image Transmission  
You can reduce the document image  
Reference  
p.145 Registering Auto Docu-  
ments”  
slightly to 93% of the original image  
1
by using this feature so that there is  
extra space on the left edge when the  
image is printed out by the other par-  
ty's fax machine. This space is useful  
when making holes for filing purpos-  
es.  
p.32 Fax Header Print”  
p.98 Label Insertion”  
p.93 Auto Reduction”  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Press [Mode].  
Limitation  
If you set "Auto Reduction (TX)"  
off with User Parameters (switch  
07 bit 3), the Reduced Image func-  
tion is not available.  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Reduced Im-  
Note  
age TX" with the number keys.  
The document image is reduced  
vertically in the direction in which  
the original is fed into the machine.  
Documents attached to a fax mes-  
sage using the Auto Document  
function are not reduced.  
Note  
If "Reduced Image TX" is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or [N-  
ext] until it is.  
The Fax Header or Label Insertion  
printed out at the other end is not  
reduced by this function.  
If the Auto Reduction function is  
specified, the document image is  
reduced to 93% or less of the origi-  
nal.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Reduced Image Transmission  
Note  
D Press 0 or 1 key to switch Re-  
duced Image on or off.  
"Red.ImgTX ON" is shown. If  
you set up other transmission  
mode functions (except Polling  
Reception), "Others" is shown.  
1
G Dial, and then press the {Start}  
key.  
Note  
To cancel changes to the Re-  
duced Image setting, press [OK]  
without making changes to the  
setting. The Transmission Mode  
menu is shown.  
E Press [OK].  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown. A check mark appears next  
to "Reduced Image TX".  
F Press [Exit].  
The standby display is shown.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
Transfer Request  
Transfer Request allows fax machines  
to automatically distribute incoming  
messages to multiple fax destina-  
tions. This feature helps you reduce  
costs when you send the same mes-  
sage to more than one place in a dis-  
tant area, and saves time since many  
messages can be sent in a single oper-  
ation.  
Limitation  
The Transfer Stations you specify  
must be machines of the same  
make as this machine and have the  
Transfer Station function.  
1
This function is not available un-  
less the End Receiver's fax number  
is stored in either a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial of the Transfer Sta-  
tion.  
End Receiver  
This function is not available un-  
less the Transfer Station's fax num-  
ber is stored in either a Quick Dial  
key or Speed Dial of the Request-  
ing Party's machine (this machine).  
Requesting  
party  
Transfer  
Station  
End Receiver  
Transfer  
Result Report  
End Receiver  
Make sure that the return address  
is set up correctly in the Transfer  
Station's machine to use this func-  
tion.  
GFCYUI0N  
The following terminology is used in  
this section.  
Note  
You can specify up to 100 Transfer  
Stations and 30 End Receivers in a  
Transfer Request.  
Requesting Party  
The machine where the message  
originates from.  
When you specify Group Dials  
stored in the Transfer Station as re-  
ceivers, one Group Dial is counted  
as one End Receiver.  
Transfer Station  
The machine that forwards the in-  
coming message to another desti-  
nation.  
Polling IDs of the requesting party  
(this machine) and Transfer Sta-  
tions must be identical.  
End Receiver  
The final destination of the mes-  
sage.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
must program the Polling ID and  
set the Transfer Report. See p.199  
Registering ID Codesand p.202  
Transfer Report.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Transfer Request  
B Press [Mode].  
E Press [Recv. Stn].  
1
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
F Enter one or more End Receivers.  
C Enter the code for "Transfer Re-  
quest" with the number keys.  
Note  
Note  
If "Transfer Request" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
The numbers must be stored in  
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials or  
D Enter a Transfer Station.  
Reference  
p.31 Specifying an End Receiv-  
er”  
G When you have specified all the  
Note  
End Receivers, press [OK].  
You cannot specify a Transfer  
Station and a normal fax desti-  
nation at the same time.  
Enter the fax numbers of the  
Transfer Stations with either  
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials or  
the number keys. See p.46 Di-  
aling, <Basic Features>.  
If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear} key or {Stop} key and  
try again.  
Note  
To cancel the Transfer Request,  
press [Cancel]. The Transmis-  
sion Mode menu is shown  
again.  
To cancel the Transfer Request,  
press [Cancel]. The Transmis-  
sion Mode menu is shown  
again.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
H When you have specified all the J Press the {Start} key.  
Transfer Stations, press [No].  
You can cancel transmission of  
a message set up for Transfer  
Request. See p.35 Canceling a  
Transmission or Reception.  
1
-Transfer Request to Other  
Manufacturers' Fax Machines  
Note  
Transfer Request only works with  
machines of the same make that have  
the Transfer Station function. Howev-  
er, you can specify other manufactur-  
ers' fax machines as the Transfer  
Station if they support a similar func-  
mission function. Make sure the other  
party supports this function before  
making a Transfer Request. See p.13  
SUB Code Transmission with the  
Mode Key.  
If you wish to enter an addition-  
al Transfer Station, press [Enter]  
and repeat steps D to F.  
Transmission Mode menu is  
shown and a check mark is added  
to Transfer Request.  
I Press [Exit].  
The following display is shown.  
Note  
"Trans.Req." is shown. If you set  
up other transmission mode  
functions (except Polling Recep-  
tion), "Others" is shown.  
The numbers of Transfer Sta-  
tions are displayed.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transfer Request  
You need to install Optional  
Function Upgrade Unit to enter  
3 digits code for the Speed Dial.  
Specifying an End Receiver  
When you make a Transfer Request,  
you must specify the final destina-  
tions (End Receivers) for your mes-  
sage.  
Group Dial  
1
Enter {q}, {p}, {p} followed  
by the Group number (2 digits).  
For example, to choose the number  
stored in Group 04 in the Transfer  
Station, enter: {q} {p} {p} {0}  
{4}.  
You cannot enter the numbers of the  
End Receivers directly. Instead, enter  
a simple code that describes where  
the numbers are stored in the Trans-  
fer Station (in Quick Dial keys, Speed  
Dials or Groups).  
The numbers must first have been  
stored in Quick Dial keys, Speed Di-  
als or Groups in the Transfer Sta-  
tion(s).  
Quick Dial  
Enter {q} followed by the num-  
ber (3 digits) of the Quick Dial  
where the End Receiver is stored.  
For example, to choose the number  
stored in Quick Dial 001 in the  
Transfer Station, enter:  
{q} {0} {0} {1}.  
Note  
If the End Receivers only sup-  
port 2 digits for the Quick Dials,  
enter the number with 2 digits  
like {q} {0} {1} .  
Speed Dial  
Enter {q}, {p} followed by the  
Speed Dial code (2 or 3 digits).  
For example, to choose the number  
stored in Speed Dial 012 in the  
Transfer Station, enter: {q} {p}  
{0} {1} {2}  
Note  
If the End Receivers only sup-  
port 2 digits for the Speed Dials,  
enter the number with 2 digits  
like {q} {p} {1} {2}.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Transmission Mode  
Fax Header Print  
Normally, the Fax Header pro-  
grammed in your machine is printed  
at the top of each of the pages you  
transmit when they are received at  
the other end. The top of the image  
will be overprinted if there is no mar-  
gin at the top of the transmitted page.  
The Fax Header Print function is  
however, you can switch this func-  
tion on for G4 communication as  
well with User Parameters. See  
06 bit 3).  
1
You can set your machine's inter-  
nal clock to the current time and  
date. See p.151 Date/Time.  
Important  
In the USA, the Fax Header must  
contain the telephone number of  
the line your machine is connected  
to. It will be printed on the header  
of every page you send. Required  
in the USA.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings as necessary.  
B Press [Mode].  
Note  
In the USA, law requires that your  
Header. Register the fax number  
and switch on Fax Header Print  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters.  
You can turn the Fax Header Print  
User Function key that this func-  
tion is assigned to. By default, this  
function is assigned to {F2}. See  
p.154 User Function Keys.  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Fax Header  
Print" with the number keys.  
You can set the machine so that it  
prints the Fax Header on the mes-  
sage when it is received on the oth-  
er end with User Parameters. It is  
option more frequently used, then  
when necessary, you can change  
the setting back with this feature.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 06 bit 0).  
Note  
If "Fax Header Print" is not  
shown, press [Prev.] or [Next].  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax Header Print  
Note  
D Press 0 or 1 key to switch Fax  
Header Print on or off.  
"Header ON" or "Header OFF"  
is shown when the Fax Header  
Print function is switched on or  
off respectively with User Pa-  
rameters. If you set up other ad-  
vanced transmissions functions  
(except Polling Reception),  
"Others" is shown.  
1
G Dial, and then press the {Start}  
key.  
Note  
Press [OK] to cancel switching  
the setting and return to the step  
C display.  
E Press [OK].  
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown. A check mark is added to  
Options.  
F Press [Exit].  
"Header OFF" is shown.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
1
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Communication  
Information  
Checking and Canceling Transmission  
Files  
You can cancel a transmission or re-  
ception that is in progress, or delete  
the Transmission files that have been  
stored in memory and are awaiting  
transmission.  
Check and Edit a File  
You can check or edit destina-  
alter the transmission time.  
You can also resend a fax that has  
failed to be transmitted. See p.38  
Checking and Editing a File.  
With this feature, you can also print a  
file (document), check or edit destina-  
tion(s), and check or alter the trans-  
mission time.  
Canceling a Transmission or  
Reception  
This section describes how you can:  
Cancel a Transmission  
You can cancel the transmission files  
that have been stored in memory and  
are awaiting transmission, or the files  
that have failed to be transmitted. If  
you notice an error in the destination  
specified or the document content af-  
ter scanning a document into memo-  
ry, you can cancel transmission of  
that document. This is done by  
searching for the document in the fax  
machine's memory and deleting it.  
You can cancel the transmission  
files that have been stored in mem-  
ory and are awaiting transmission,  
or the files that have failed to be  
transmitted. If you notice an error  
in the destination specified or the  
document into memory, you can  
cancel transmission of that docu-  
ment. See p.35 Canceling a Trans-  
mission or Reception.  
Also, you can cancel a reception in  
progress.  
Cancel a Reception  
You can cancel reception in  
progress. See p.35 Canceling a  
Transmission or Reception.  
This function can be performed for  
Memory Transmission, Confidential  
Transmission, Transfer Request, Poll-  
ing Reception, and Polling Transmis-  
sion.  
Print a File  
You can print and check the con-  
tents of a fax that is stored in mem-  
ory and has not been sent yet. See  
p.37 Printing a Stored Message.  
Note  
If you cancel a file being sent, the  
communication is immediately  
stopped and canceled. A page  
which has already been sent can-  
not be canceled.  
Files that are produced from  
Transfer Request or Forwarding  
cannot be canceled.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Communication Information  
B Press[ Yes].  
A Press [Info.].  
2
The file is erased.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
Note  
B Enter the code for "Check/Cancel  
Press [No] to cancel the oper-  
ation and return to the step C  
display.  
Files" with the number keys.  
To delete another file, select  
the file by pressing the 0 or  
1 key, then repeat the same  
steps.  
C Press 0 or 1 key until the file  
you wish to delete is shown.  
Canceling a reception that is in  
progress  
A Press [Stop].  
Canceling a transmission that is  
in progress or has been stored in  
memory  
B Press [Yes].  
A Press [Delete].  
Transmission is canceled.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Note  
B Enter the code for "Check/Cancel  
Files" with the number keys.  
Press [No] to cancel the oper-  
ation and return to the step C  
display.  
To delete another file, select  
the file by pressing the 0 or  
1 key, then repeat the same  
steps.  
C Press the 0 or 1 key until the file  
2
you wish to print is shown.  
D Press [Exit].  
D Press [Print].  
The standby display is shown.  
Printing a Stored Message  
If you wish to check the contents of a  
fax stored in memory and not sent  
yet, use this procedure to print it out.  
This function can be performed for  
files produced by Memory Transmis-  
sion, Transfer Request, Polling Trans-  
mission, files received by Transfer  
Request from other Requesting Par-  
ties, or files awaiting Forwarding.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
A Press [Info.].  
The file is printed.  
Note  
Press [Cancel] to stop printing  
the file and return to step D dis-  
play.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Communication Information  
F Press [Exit].  
Checking and Editing a File  
Use this procedure to check or edit  
destination(s), check options selected  
or alter the transmission time.  
This function can be performed for  
the files produced by Memory Trans-  
mission, Confidential Transmission,  
Transfer Request and Polling Recep-  
tion.  
2
The "Information" menu is shown  
again.  
You can check or change the follow-  
ing items:  
Note  
Destination List  
To print another file, select the  
file by pressing the 0 or 1 key,  
then repeat the same steps.  
This list shows all the destinations  
specified for the transmission.  
Changing a destination  
G Press [Exit].  
You can change or edit the destina-  
tions of the file. However, you can-  
not change the destinations of files  
for Transfer Request or Confiden-  
tial Transmission.  
Changing the transmission time/  
Re-sending a file  
You can alter the transmission  
time. Also, if there are any failed  
transmission files in Memory  
Transmission, you can choose to  
resend them.  
The standby display is shown.  
Preparation  
Be sure to set the File Retention  
function to either "24 hours" or "72  
hours" to resend the failed trans-  
mission files beforehand. See p.201  
File Retention.  
Note  
You cannot set or change the trans-  
mission time, or delete or add des-  
tinations when the file is being sent  
or received.  
Files that have been received by  
Transfer Request from other Re-  
questing Parties cannot be viewed  
or edited.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
A Press [Info.].  
E Depending on the setting you  
wish to check or change, use one  
of the following procedures:  
Checking destinations  
(Destination List)  
A Enter the code for "Destination  
2
List" with the number keys.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Check/Cancel  
Files" with the number keys.  
The total number of destina-  
tions and the fax number or  
each destination's name is  
shown.  
B Press [Exit].  
C Press the 0 or 1 key until the file  
you wish to print is shown.  
Note  
To see hidden destinations,  
press [Prev.] or [Next].  
D Press [Check].  
C Press [Exit].  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communication Information  
D Press [Exit].  
Changing the transmission time  
A Enter the code for "Change  
Start Time" with the number  
keys.  
2
B Enter the transmission time  
(four digits) with the number  
keys.  
Re-sending a file  
A Enter the code for "Retransmit  
" with the number keys.  
Press [AM/PM] to switch between  
AM and PM. To clear the en-  
tries, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key.  
B Press [Yes].  
Note  
You cannot specify a start  
time more than 24 hours into  
the future.  
The current time does not ap-  
pear on the display.  
To start transmission imme-  
diately, press [Immediate]. If  
memory contains other files  
queued for transmission,  
those files are sent first.  
Note  
If you do not wish to send the  
file, press [No] to return to  
step A.  
C Enter the code for "Change  
Start Time" with the number  
keys.  
C Press [Exit].  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
D Enter the start time with the  
Changing a destination  
number keys.  
You can delete or add destinations.  
A Enter the code for "Change  
Destination" with the number  
keys.  
Press [AM/PM] to switch between  
AM and PM.  
2
Note  
You cannot specify a start  
time more than 24 hours into  
the future.  
B Change the destination.  
To start transmission imme-  
diately, press [Immediate]. If  
memory contains other files  
queued for transmission,  
those files are sent first.  
Note  
To cancel a destination, press  
E Press [Exit].  
the {Stop} key or {Clear} key.  
To add a destination, press  
[Add] and enter the fax num-  
ber with the number keys.  
Destinations can be specified  
only by using the number  
keys.  
The destination is added to  
the end of the list.  
F Press [Exit].  
If you change a destination of  
a file that is automatically be-  
ing dialed or awaiting redial,  
redial is canceled so you will  
need to resend that file.  
C Press [Exit].  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communication Information  
D Press [Exit].  
2
F Press [Exit].  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
G Press [Exit].  
The standby display is shown.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)  
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX  
File List)  
Print this list if you wish to find out  
C Press the {Start} key.  
which files are stored in memory and  
what their file numbers are. Knowing  
the file number can be useful (for ex-  
ample, when erasing files).  
2
Note  
The Transmission File List is print-  
You can also print this list with  
ed. When the printing is complet-  
Displaying the Files in Memory  
ed, the "Information" menu is  
shown.  
Files in Memory.  
Note  
The contents of a document stored  
in memory can also be printed. See  
p.37 Printing a Stored Message.  
Press [Cancel] to stop printing  
the file list and return to the "In-  
formation" menu.  
A Press [Info.].  
D Press [Exit].  
The "Information" menu is dis-  
played.  
The standby display is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Print TX File  
list" with the number keys.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Communication Information  
Checking the Transmission Result (TX  
Status)  
If you wish to find out whether a file  
C When you have finished, press  
[OK].  
was sent successfully, you don't have  
to always print the Journal. With this  
function you can browse through the  
last 250 completed transmissions on  
the display.  
2
Note  
Note  
If a transmission is completed  
while you are using this function,  
the result will not be shown until  
you exit TX Status and start it  
again.  
The results are shown two at a  
time with the most recent  
above.  
Press [Prev.] or [Next] to scroll  
through the list.  
Only the last 250 transmissions are  
shown. Earlier transmissions are  
not available.  
D Press [Exit].  
When the optional Function Up-  
grade card is installed, you can  
check up to 1,000 communications.  
A Press [Info.].  
The standby display is shown.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "TX Files Sta-  
tus" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "TX Files Status" is not shown,  
press [Prev.] or [Next].  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking the Reception Result (RX Status)  
Checking the Reception Result (RX Status)  
This function lets you check the last  
C When you have finished, press  
250 messages received without hav-  
[OK].  
ing to print the Journal. You can  
browse through the received messag-  
es on the display.  
2
Note  
If a message is received while you  
are using this function, the result  
will not be shown until you exit RX  
File Status and start it again.  
Only the last 250 messages are dis-  
Note  
played. Earlier messages are not  
The results are shown two at a  
time with the most recent  
above.  
available.  
When the optional Function Up-  
grade card is installed, you can  
check up to 1,000 communications.  
Press [Prev.] or [Next] to scroll  
through the messages.  
A Press [Info.].  
D Press [Exit].  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
The standby display is shown.  
B Enter the code for "RX Files Sta-  
tus" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "RX Files Status" is not shown,  
press [Prev.] or [Next].  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
                                                        
                                                        
Communication Information  
Printing a Confidential Message  
This feature is designed to prevent  
A Make sure that the i indicator is  
messages being picked up casually by  
anyone when they are received. If  
someone sends you a message using  
Confidential Transmission, it is  
stored in memory and not automati-  
cally printed. To print the message  
you have to enter the Confidential ID  
code. When your machine has re-  
ceived a confidential message, the i  
indicator lights.  
lit.  
2
Preparation  
B Press [Info.].  
Before using this function, pro-  
gram your Confidential ID. See  
p.199 Registering ID Codes.  
Important  
If the power switch is off for 12  
hours or longer, all Confidential  
Messages are deleted. In such a  
case, use the Power Failure Report  
to identify which messages have  
been lost. See p.264 Power Failure  
Report.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
C Enter the code for "Print Conf.  
RX" with the number keys.  
Note  
fax with SUB code, the message is  
printed by Printing Personal Box  
Messages function. See p.67  
Printing Personal Box Messages.  
Note  
Be sure that the other party enters  
a SUB code beforehand using up to  
20 characters with digits 0-9, q, p  
and spaces.  
If "Print Conf. RX" is not shown,  
press [Prev.] or [Next].  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Confidential Message  
D Enter the Confidential ID (4-digit  
Confidential File Report  
number) with the number keys.  
You can set whether the machine  
prints this report whenever your ma-  
chine receives a Confidential Mes-  
sage.  
Note  
Note  
2
You can turn this report on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 04 bit  
0).  
If you receive a fax by Confiden-  
tial ID Override Reception, en-  
ter the override Confidential ID.  
See p.7 Sending Confidential  
Messages.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
The received messages are printed.  
When printing has finished, the  
"Information" menu is shown.  
Note  
If no Confidential Messages  
have been received, the mes-  
sage "No matching file  
found." is shown.  
If the Confidential IDs or Per-  
sonal Confidential IDs do not  
match, the message "No match-  
ing file found. " is dis-  
played. Press [Cancel], check the  
Confidential ID or Personal  
Confidential ID with the other  
party and try again.  
F Press [Exit].  
The standby display is shown.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
                                                        
                                                        
Communication Information  
Printing a Memory-locked Message  
This is a security feature designed to  
A Make sure that the i indicator is  
prevent unauthorized users from  
reading your messages. If Memory  
Lock is switched on, all received mes-  
sages are stored in memory and are  
not automatically printed. To print  
the messages, you have to enter the  
Memory Lock ID code. When your  
machine has received a message with  
Memory Lock, the i indicator  
blinks.  
blinking.  
2
Preparation  
B Press [Info.].  
Make sure to program your Mem-  
ory Lock ID beforehand. See p.199  
Registering ID Codes. Also, be-  
fore you start, turn Memory Lock  
on with the User Tools. See p.233  
Memory Lock. .  
Important  
If the power switch is off for 12  
hours or longer, all Confidential  
Messages are deleted. In such a  
case, use the Power Failure Report  
to identify which messages have  
been lost. See p.264 Power Failure  
Report.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
C Enter the code for "Print Mem.  
Lock" with the number keys.  
Note  
Messages received by Polling Re-  
ception are automatically printed  
even if this feature is switched on.  
See p.19 Polling Reception.  
Note  
If "Print Mem. Lock" is not  
shown on the display, press  
[Prev.] or [Next].  
When your machine does not have  
enough free memory, you may not  
be able to receive fax messages  
with Memory Lock.  
D Enter the Memory Lock ID (4-dig-  
it number).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Memory-locked Message  
E Press the {Start} key.  
The received messages are printed.  
When the printing is completed,  
the "Information" menu is shown.  
Note  
If no messages have been re-  
ceived, the following message  
appears: "No matching file  
found."  
2
If the Memory Lock IDs do not  
match, the following message  
appears: "No matching file  
found. " Press [Cancel] and re-  
try after checking the Memory  
Lock ID.  
F Press [Exit] .  
The standby display is shown.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Printing the Journal  
The Journal contains information on  
up to 50 of the last communications  
made by your machine. It is printed  
automatically after every 50 commu-  
nications (receptions + transmis-  
sions).  
Note  
Only the last 50 transmissions are  
printed. Earlier transmissions are  
not available.  
You can browse through up to the  
last 250 communications on the  
display. With the optional Func-  
tion Upgrade Unit installed, you  
can check up to 1,000 communica-  
tions.  
2
You can also print a copy of the Jour-  
nal at any time by following the pro-  
cedure below.  
Important  
You cannot re-print the Journal af-  
ter it has been automatically print-  
ed out. We recommend that you  
keep the Journal printed out auto-  
matically to keep track of commu-  
nication records.  
The sender's name column of the  
Journal is useful when you need to  
register a Specified Sender.  
You can set your machine so that  
ly after every 50 communications  
(receptions + transmissions) with  
User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters.  
All  
All communication results are  
printed in the order of transmis-  
sion and reception.  
When the optional Paper Supply  
Unit is installed, you can specify  
which tray unit the designated re-  
ports or lists are printed out from.  
However, once a tray unit is speci-  
fied for the reports or lists printing,  
that tray will not be able to print  
any fax messages the machine re-  
ceives. See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 19 bits 2, 1, 0).  
File No.  
Only the communication result of  
the specified file number is print-  
ed.  
User Code  
Only the communication results of  
the User Code Transmission or the  
stricted Access function with the  
specified User Code (the SUB code  
of the Personal Box) are printed.  
See p.10 User Code Transmis-  
sionand p.25 Restricted Ac-  
cess, <Basic Features>.  
You can assign the Printing the  
Journal function to a User Function  
key. When shipped, it is assigned  
to {F1 Journal} key.  
Date  
Only the communication results of  
the specified date are printed.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing the Journal  
A Press [Info.].  
When choosing "File No."  
A Press [OK].  
2
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Print Journal"  
B Enter a 4-digit file number  
with the number keys.  
with the number keys.  
Note  
When choosing "User Code"  
If "Print Journal" is not shown,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] .  
A Press [OK].  
C Press 0 or 1 key to select the for-  
mat you require.  
B Enter a User Code (up to 20 dig-  
its) with the number keys.  
When choosing "All"  
A Press [OK].  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
When choosing "Date"  
A Press [OK].  
2
B Select the month using the  
[Month ] and [Month ], press 1  
key, and then enter the date us-  
ing the number keys.  
D Press the {Start} key.  
The Journal is printed.  
Note  
Press [Cancel] to return to step C.  
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display is shown.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Journal  
Printing the Journal  
You can check the communication results on this report.  
Note  
When choosing "File No.", "User Code" or "Date", Personal Journal is printed.  
Communications made after the machine is connected to the line are printed  
2
on the Journal.  
You can set the machine to reduce the reports to 91% of the original size when  
printing with User Parameters. This allows an extra margin which may be  
useful when filing. See p.178 User Parameters(switch 04 bit 5).  
You can select whether or not undelivered messages are to be included on this  
report with User Parameters. When using the Automatic Redial function, the  
result of the last dialing is printed.  
Normally, when specifying the destination with a Quick Dial key or Speed  
Dial, "ADDRESS" on this report shows Own Name or Own Fax Number reg-  
istered in the receiver's machine. However, you can change the setting with  
User Parameters so that the name or number of the destination stored in the  
Quick Dial key or Speed Dial in your machine is printed instead. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 04 bit 4).  
All  
1. DATE  
2. TIME  
The date of the transmission/recep-  
tion  
The time when the transmission/re-  
ception started  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Communication Information  
3. ADDRESS  
8. RESULT  
The other party's names are printed in  
the following priority order:  
OK Successful communication  
E
An error occurred  
The Pri- Address  
ority  
Order  
D
The power was shutdown while  
the communication. A part of the  
originals has not been transmit-  
ted.  
1
2
The Own Name registered in  
the other party's machine *1  
2
9. USER NAME  
The Own Fax Number regis-  
tered in the other party's ma-  
chine *1  
When in User Code Transmission or  
the Restricted Access function turned  
on, the name of the users registered  
are printed.  
3
4
The name stored in the speci-  
fied Quick Dial key or a Speed  
Dial  
10. FAX HEADERS  
The names or numbers registered un-  
der FAX HEADER 1 and FAX HEAD-  
ER 2 are printed.  
The fax number entered man-  
ually using the number keys  
*1  
When in the G4 transmission, G4  
11. This appears when the Journal  
TID is printed.  
was printed manually.  
ed, however, you can change the pri-  
ority order to 3, 4, 1, 2 with User  
Parameters (switch 04 bit 4). See p.178  
User Parameters. When in a recep-  
tion or a polling transmission, 1 or 2 is  
printed.  
12. FILE  
The file number of the fax message  
13. The Footnote on the Journal  
Explains the codes printed on the  
Journal.  
4. MODE  
The types of the communication mode  
are printed:  
"G3-AT", "G3", "G3-1", "G3-2", "PX-  
AT", "PX", "PX-1", "PX-2", "I-PX", "I-  
G3", "G4".  
5. The time of the output of the Jour-  
nal  
6. TIME  
The time it took to transmit/receive.  
When it exceeds 99 minutes 59 sec-  
onds, "*" will be printed instead.  
7. PAGE  
The pages you transmitted or re-  
ceived. When it exceeds 999, "***" will  
be printed instead.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Journal  
Date  
2
1. The time of the output of the Jour-  
3. The Footnote on the Journal  
nal  
Explains the codes printed on the  
Journal.  
2. FAX HEADERS  
The names or numbers registered un-  
der FAX HEADER 1 and FAX HEAD-  
ER 2 are printed.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Displaying the Files in Memory  
Use this function to display a summa-  
Note  
ry of current memory usage. Items  
shown are the percentage of free  
memory space, the number of re-  
ceived confidential messages, the  
number of files to be sent, and the  
number of received messages to be  
printed.  
following kinds of files:  
Auto Documents  
See p.145 Registering Auto  
Documents.  
2
Incoming messages sent with  
See p.28 Transfer Request.  
A Press [Info.].  
Messages that have been re-  
ceived into Transfer Boxes  
See p.254 Transfer Boxes.  
PC Printing data file (when  
optional Printer Interface is  
installed)  
To print the Transmission File  
List  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Files in Mem-  
A Press [Prt.List].  
ory" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "Files in Memory" is not  
shown, press [Prev.] or [Next].  
B Press the {Start} key.  
C The usage is displayed. When  
you have finished, press [OK].  
The list is printed, and the dis-  
play in step C reappears.  
Note  
Press [Cancel] to stop printing  
the Transmission File List  
and return to step C.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Displaying the Files in Memory  
D Press [Exit].  
2
The standby display is shown.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
TX/RX File Save  
This feature requires the optional Function Upgrade Unit and Optional 40MB Memory  
Card.  
When turned on, sent or received  
memory. Once stored you can then  
check on previous communications  
and print them out as necessary. See  
p.236 TX/RX File Save Settings.  
Printing Files  
You can print out the fax messages  
stored in the memory. See p.65  
Printing Files.  
2
Deleting Files  
You can delete the fax messages  
stored in the memory. See p.66  
Deleting Files.  
Preparation  
You can turn this function on or off  
with TX/RX File Save. See p.236  
TX/RX File Save Settings.  
Important  
If a TX/RX file is saved in memory,  
it does not guarantee that the com-  
munication was successful. Mes-  
sages that were not delivered, or  
generated an error are also stored.  
This feature allows you to perform  
the followings:  
Searching Memory for Sent Faxes  
You can search the sent faxes in the  
Date/Time, User Code and File  
Number. You can print out a list of  
the search result. See p.59 Search-  
ing Memory for Sent Faxes.  
Limitation  
If any of following features are  
used, messages are not stored in  
memory:  
Immediate Transmission  
Confidential Transmission  
Polling Transmission  
Confidential Reception  
Memory Lock Reception  
Transfer Request Reception  
Auto Documents  
Searching Memory for Received Fax-  
es  
You can search the received faxes  
No., Date/Time, User Code and  
File Number. You can print out a  
list of the search result. See p.62  
Searching Memory for Received  
Faxes.  
Forwarding  
Fax On Demand (Option)  
Disk File Search List/Visual List  
search result for "Searching Memo-  
ry for Sent Faxes" and "Searching  
Memory for Received Faxes". See  
p.65 Disk File Search List/Visual  
List.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
TX/RX File Save  
When "Substitute Reception" is set  
to "Memory Reception if no Own  
Name or Own Fax Number re-  
ceived" and the incoming fax does  
not have either Own Name or Own  
Fax Number information, you can-  
not use the TX/RX File Save func-  
tion. Set the "Substitute Reception"  
to "Possible", or have the sender of  
the fax register his/her Own Name  
or Own Fax Number. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 05 bit 1).  
Searching Memory for Sent  
Faxes  
A Press [Info.].  
2
Note  
When free memory goes below  
50%, the oldest stored message is  
erased.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "TX/RX File  
You can set whether or not this  
function to work only when receiv-  
ing the messages from Specified  
Senders. See p.236 TX/RX File  
Save Settings.  
Save" with the number keys.  
This function stores both transmis-  
sions and receptions. Your service  
representative can change this to  
one of the following options:  
Note  
If "TX/RX File Save" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Transmissions Only  
Receptions Only  
C Enter the code for "Search TX  
File" with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Head-  
er/Own Fax Number, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
D Press [Search].  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Communication Information  
Note  
Searching By Date/Time  
To print a list of all the sent fax-  
es, press [Prt.List]. The display in  
step I will appear.  
A Select the month using the  
[Month ] and [Month ] and en-  
ter the date, year and time us-  
ing 0 or 1 key and the  
number keys. To change  
AM/PM, press [AM/PM].  
E Enter the code of the search meth-  
od you require.  
2
F Do one of the following:  
Searching By Sender Name / No.  
A Enter the Own Name or Own  
Fax Number using the Quick  
Dial keys or number keys.  
Note  
If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel], and the display in  
step E appears.  
B Press [OK].  
Note  
Press [ABC/abc] to switch be-  
tween upper and lower case.  
Press [Symbols] if you wish to  
enter symbols.  
Reference  
See p.98 Entering Charac-  
ters, <Basic Features> and  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Head-  
er/Own Fax Number, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
Searching By User Code (SUB  
Code)  
A Enter the User Code/SUB Code  
(up to 20 digits) with the num-  
ber keys.  
B Press [OK].  
Enter the User Code (the SUB  
code of the Personal Box).  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TX/RX File Save  
Reference  
p.10 User Code Transmis-  
sion.  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press [Prt.List].  
Note  
B Press [OK].  
2
Note  
When an unregistered User  
Code is entered, the follow-  
ing message appears: "Not  
programmed.", then the dis-  
play in step B will reappear.  
Searching By File Number  
If you wish to do a fresh search,  
press [Search] and return to step  
E.  
A Enter the file number (four  
digits) with the number keys.  
Press 0 or 1 key to check  
through the file numbers of the  
search results.  
I Press 0 or 1 key to choose  
whether the image is printed on  
the list.  
B Press [OK].  
Note  
To cancel this operation, press  
[Cancel]. The display in step C  
reappears.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
J Press the {Start} key to print the D Press [Search].  
list.  
Reference  
p.65 Disk File Search List/Vi-  
sual List”  
K Press [PrevMenu].  
2
L Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
To print a list of all the received  
Searching Memory for  
Received Faxes  
faxes, press [Prt.List]. The dis-  
play in step I will appear.  
E Enter the code of the search meth-  
A Press [Info.].  
od you require.  
F Carry out one of the following  
procedures appropriate to the  
search method:  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
Searching By Sender Name / No.  
B Enter the code for "TX/RX File  
Save" with the number keys.  
A Enter the Own Name or Own  
Fax Number using the Quick  
Dial keys or number keys.  
Note  
If "TX/RX File Save" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
Press [ABC/abc] to switch be-  
tween upper and lower case.  
C Enter the code for "Search RX  
Press [Symbols] if you wish to  
File" with the number keys.  
enter symbols.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TX/RX File Save  
B Press [OK].  
Reference  
See p.98 Entering Charac-  
ters, <Basic Features> and  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Head-  
er/Own Fax Number, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
B Press [OK].  
2
Searching By User Code (SUB  
Code)  
A Enter the User Code/SUB Code  
(up to 20 digits) with the num-  
ber keys.  
Searching By Date/Time  
A Select the month using the  
[Month ] and [Month ] and en-  
ter the date, year and time us-  
ing 0 or 1 key and the  
number keys. To change  
AM/PM, press [AM/PM].  
Enter the User Code (the SUB  
code of the Personal Box).  
Note  
You can search received fax-  
es with the User Codes when  
those codes have been al-  
ready registered in your fax  
machine at the time of the re-  
ception with the following  
conditions:  
Polling Reception  
Polling Reception with  
SEP/PWD (fax messages  
with IDs or the documents  
stored in Information Box-  
es)  
Note  
If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel], and the display in  
step E appears.  
SEP Code Polling Recep-  
tion (fax messages sent  
with Polling Transmission  
or documents stored in In-  
formation Boxes)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
B Press [OK].  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press [Prt.List].  
Note  
2
Note  
When an unregistered User  
Code is entered, the follow-  
ing message appears: "Not  
play in step B will reappear.  
Reference  
p.10 User Code Transmis-  
sion”  
Searching By File Number  
If you wish to do a fresh search,  
press [Search] and return to step  
E.  
A Enter the file number (four  
digits) with the number keys.  
Press 0 or 1 key to check  
through the file numbers of the  
search results.  
I Press 0 or 1 key to choose  
B Press [OK].  
whether the image is printed.  
Note  
To cancel this operation, press  
[Cancel]. The display in step C  
reappears.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TX/RX File Save  
Printing Files  
list.  
Follow these steps to print files that  
have been stored in your machine's  
memory.  
Reference  
p.65 Disk File Search List/Vi-  
sual List”  
A Press [Info.].  
K Press [PrevMenu].  
2
L Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Disk File Search List/Visual  
List  
Print either of these lists for a hard  
copy of the search results generated  
by the Search TX File and Search RX  
File functions. You can choose to have  
transmitted and received document  
images printed on this list.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "TX/RX File  
Save" with the number keys.  
If you choose "Without Image", the  
Disk File Search List is printed.  
If you choose "With Image" the Disk  
File Visual List is printed.  
Note  
If "TX/RX File Save" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
Normally, when specifying the  
destination with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial, "ADDRESS" on this  
report shows Own Name or Own  
Fax Number registered in the re-  
ceiver's machine. However, you  
can change the setting with User  
number of the destination stored  
in the Quick Dial key or Speed Dial  
in your machine is printed instead.  
C Enter the code for "Print File"  
with the number keys.  
D Enter the file number of the mes-  
sage (four digits) you wish to  
print with the number keys.  
p.44 Checking the Transmission  
Result (TX Status)”  
p.45 Checking the Reception Re-  
sult (RX Status)”  
Note  
If there is no matching file, "No  
matching file found." is dis-  
played.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Communication Information  
E Press the {Start} key to print the D Enter the file number of the mes-  
message.  
sage (four digits) you wish to de-  
lete with the number keys.  
F Press [PrevMenu].  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
2
Note  
Deleting Files  
If there is no matching file, "No  
matching file found." is dis-  
played.  
Follow these steps to delete files that  
have been stored in your machine's  
memory.  
E Press [OK].  
F Press [Yes].  
Note  
A Press [Info.].  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "TX/RX File  
Save" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "TX/RX File Save" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Press [No] to return to the dis-  
play in step C.  
G Press [PrevMenu].  
C Enter the code for "Delete File"  
with the number keys.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Box File Manager Functions  
Box File Manager Functions  
See the following pages for how to  
register, print and delete messages  
stored in box functions.  
Printing Personal Box  
Messages  
Preparation  
Follow these steps to print a message  
received in a Personal Box.  
In order to use the Personal Boxes  
function, you need to set up Per-  
sonal Boxes or Information Boxes  
in the "Box Settings" beforehand.  
See p.245 Box Settings.  
2
Note  
When a message has been received  
into a Personal Box, the i indica-  
Report is printed. This report  
shows the name of the Personal  
Box in which the message has been  
received. See p.47 Confidential  
Printing Personal Box Messages  
Print a message received in a Per-  
sonal Box. See p.67 Printing Per-  
sonal Box Messages.  
If you print a Personal Box mes-  
es  
sage, it is deleted.  
Store a message in an Information  
Box. See p.69 Storing Messages in  
Information Boxes.  
A Press [Info.].  
Printing Information Box Messages  
Print a message stored in an Infor-  
mation Box. See p.70 Printing In-  
formation Box Messages.  
Deleting Information Box Messages  
Delete a message stored in an In-  
Information Box Messages.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Box File Man-  
ager" with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.245 What is the SUB/SEP  
Code?”  
p.246 Personal Boxes”  
p.251 Information Boxes”  
Note  
If "Box File Manager" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Communication Information  
C Enter the code for "Print Personal- F Press the {Start} key to print the  
Box" with the number keys.  
message.  
Note  
D Enter the SUB code of the Person-  
2
al Box you wish to print.  
Press [Cancel] to return to the  
display in step D.  
To stop printing, press the  
{Stop} key. The display in step  
D will reappear.  
G Press [PrevMenu].  
E Press [OK].  
Note  
Note  
If there are messages in other  
Personal Boxes, the display in  
step D will reappear, press [Pre-  
vMenu] twice.  
If a password is required, enter  
the password then press [OK].  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
If there are no received messag-  
es, "No matching file  
found." is displayed then the  
screen in step D reappears.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box File Manager Functions  
D Enter the SEP code of the Infor-  
mation Box you wish to store the  
message in.  
Storing Messages in  
Information Boxes  
Follow these steps to store a message  
in an Information Box.  
Note  
2
E Press [OK].  
each Information Box.  
To delete a stored message in In-  
formation Box, see p.71 Deleting  
Information Box Messages.  
A Press [Info.].  
Note  
If a password is required, enter  
the password then press [OK].  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Box File Man-  
ager" with the number keys.  
When there is already a stored  
message in the selected Infor-  
mation Box, the message below  
appears. If you wish to over-  
write the stored message with  
the new message, press [Yes ]. If  
you press [No], the display in  
step D reappears.  
Note  
If "Box File Manager" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
C Enter the code for "Prog. Info.  
File" with the number keys.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Communication Information  
F Set the original you wish to store,  
and select any scan settings as  
necessary.  
Printing Information Box  
Messages  
Follow these steps to print a message  
stored in an Information Box.  
A Press [Info.].  
2
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
G Press the {Start} key.  
Your document is scanned in.  
To cancel scanning, press the  
{Stop} key. The display in step D  
reappears.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
B Enter the code for "Box File Man-  
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
ager" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "Box File Manager" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
If you wish to continue storing a  
message in another Information  
Box, repeat the steps from D.  
C Enter the code for "Print Info.  
File" with the number keys.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
D Enter the SEP code stored for the  
Information Box.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Box File Manager Functions  
E Press [OK].  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
2
Note  
Note  
If a password is required, enter  
the password then press [OK].  
To print messages that are  
stored in other Information Box-  
es, repeat the steps from the dis-  
play in step D.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
If no message is stored, "No  
matching file found." is dis-  
played and the screen in step D  
reappears.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
Deleting Information Box  
Messages  
Follow these steps to delete a message  
stored in an Information Box.  
The message is printed.  
Note  
A Press [Info.].  
Press [Cancel] to return to the  
display in step D.  
To cancel printing, press the  
{Stop} key. The display in step  
D reappears.  
The "Information" menu is shown.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Communication Information  
If no message is stored, "No  
matching file found." is dis-  
played and the screen in step D  
reappears.  
B Enter the code for "Box File Man-  
ager" with the number keys.  
F Press [Yes].  
Note  
2
If "Box File Manager" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
C Enter the code for "Del. Info. File"  
with the number keys.  
G Press [Yes].  
The Information Box message is  
deleted.  
D Enter the SEP code of the Infor-  
mation Box you wish to delete.  
E Press [OK].  
Note  
If you press [No], the message is  
not deleted and the display in  
step D reappears.  
H Press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
If a password is required, enter  
the password then press [OK].  
Note  
If messages are stored in other  
Information Boxes, the display  
in step D appears, press [Prev-  
Menu] twice.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box File Manager Functions  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
2
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
2
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Other Transmission Features  
Handy Dialing Functions  
A Set the original and select any  
Chain Dial  
scan settings as necessary.  
This feature allows you to compose a  
B Press {Quick Dial 001}.  
telephone number from various  
parts, some of which may be stored as  
Quick Dial keys or Speed Dial codes,  
and some of which may be entered  
with the number keys.  
You can program commonly used  
area or country codes into Speed Dial  
codes or Quick Dial keys.  
C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.  
Note  
The maximum number of digits  
you can enter is 254.  
With Memory Transmission or Im-  
mediate Transmission, press the  
D Press the {Quick Dial 003} key.  
{Pause/Redial} key after entering  
digits using the number keys, a  
pause will be entered. However,  
this is not necessary with On Hook  
Dial and Manual Dial.  
Example: 01133-1-5551234 (From the  
United States to Paris).  
Assume that the following Quick Dial  
and Speed Dial numbers have al-  
ready been programmed.  
E Press the {Pause/Redial} key.  
Quick Dial 001 = 01133 (Overseas  
to France)  
Quick Dial 003 = 1 (Paris)  
Speed Dial 001 = 5551234  
F Press the {Speed Dial} key.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Other Transmission Features  
G Press {0}{0}{1}.  
C Press [Tel.Dir.].  
Note  
If you wish to specify another  
destination, press [Add], then re-  
peat steps from B.  
D Enter the search letter by pressing  
one of the Quick Dial keys (A to  
Z).  
3
H Press the {Start} key.  
Telephone Directory  
Note  
Key layout of the Quick Dial  
keys are either "QWERTY" or  
"ABCDE", depending on the  
settings you made. See p.205  
Key Layout.  
This feature lets you find a stored  
Speed Dial quickly by just entering a  
single letter, for example, the first let-  
ter of the name stored for that num-  
ber.  
E Press [OK].  
Limitation  
Speed Dial codes cannot be  
searched for by symbol or number.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Press the {Speed Dial} key.  
The names or fax numbers regis-  
tered in Speed Dials are shown in  
numerical order on the display.  
F Enter the two-digit code (00 to 99)  
or three-digit code (000 to 999) of  
the Speed Dial with the number  
keys.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handy Dialing Functions  
The machine only remembers the  
most recent single number that  
was dialed with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial. If a transmission di-  
aled with the number keys takes  
place after a transmission using a  
Quick Dial key or Speed Dial, the  
previous 10 memorized numbers  
are erased.  
Note  
When the optional Function  
Upgrade Unit is installed, enter  
a Speed Dial code in the range  
000 to 999.  
If the list does not contain the  
desired destination, press  
[Prev. ] or [Next ].  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} or {Stop} key  
to try again.  
Even when dialing with the num-  
ber keys, when the number has  
Own Name or Own Fax Number  
registered, the name or number  
registered appears. See p.55 Own  
Name/Fax Header/Own Fax  
Number, <Basic Features>.  
3
G Press the {Start} key.  
Redial  
The machine remembers the  
Group Dials in which only one  
destination is stored.  
The machine memorizes the last 10  
destinations that have been dialed. If  
you wish to send a message to a des-  
tination which you faxed to recently,  
the Redial feature saves you finding  
and entering the number again.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Press the {Pause/Redial} key  
Note  
The following kinds of destina-  
tions are not memorized:  
Group Dials  
Destinations dialed as End Re-  
ceivers for Transfer Request  
Destination of Memory File  
Transfer  
Destinations dialed using the  
external telephone keypad  
The last number dialed appears.  
Destinations dialed by Redial  
(regarded as already memo-  
rized)  
C Enter the code of the number you  
wish to redial.  
The machine only remembers the  
most recent single number that  
was dialed with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial.  
When redialing the destination  
registered in a Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial, the registered name  
appears.  
Note  
If the list does not contain the  
desired destination, press  
[Prev. ] or [Next ].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
   
Other Transmission Features  
SUB Codes are printed on the fol-  
SUB/SID (SUB Code  
Transmission)  
File Reserve Report (Memory  
Transmission)  
Normally you can only use Confiden-  
tial Transmission or Transfer Request  
to send to fax machines of the same  
make that have the Confidential Re-  
ception or the Transfer Request fea-  
ture. However, if the other machine  
supports a similar feature called  
SUB/SID, you can send fax messages  
to the other party using this method  
instead.  
(Memory Transmission).  
Reference  
p.7 Sending Confidential Messag-  
es”  
p.28 Transfer Request”  
p.246 Personal Boxes”  
p.254 Transfer Boxes”  
3
p.63 Quick Dial, <Basic Fea-  
You can also use SUB code Transmis-  
sion to send messages to Personal  
Boxes and Transfer Boxes registered  
in other fax machines.  
tures>  
p.76 Speed Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
p.87 Groups, <Basic Features>  
p.136 Program/Delete Menu”  
You need to assign the Dial Op-  
tions feature to a User Function  
key beforehand. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Dial the destination fax number  
Limitation  
with the number key.  
SUB Code Transmission is only  
available with G3, and is not avail-  
able with G4.  
Note  
with the Default ID, the SUB Code C Press the User Function key ({F1}  
of the Sub Code Transmission with  
the Mode key function is not avail-  
able. See p.13 SUB Code Trans-  
mission with the Mode Key.  
to {F10}) assigned with the Dial  
Options feature.  
You can enter numbers up to 20  
digits.  
You can also store the SUB Codes  
in addition to the other parties  
names and fax numbers in Quick  
Dial keys, Speed Dials, or Key  
Stroke Programs.  
D Enter the code for "SUB" with the  
number key.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handy Dialing Functions  
B Enter the SID, then press [OK].  
E Enter the SUB code, then press  
[OK].  
Note  
3
You can enter up to 20 char-  
Note  
acters.  
Make sure to enter the same  
SUB code that is stored in the  
Personal Box, or the SUB code  
of the Transfer Box of the other  
parties'.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q,  
p and spaces. To enter a  
space, press [Space] (the first  
character cannot be a space).  
If you incorrectly enter the  
code, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
Make sure that the ID you  
enter conforms with the  
specifications of the other  
party's fax machine.  
You can enter up to 20 charac-  
ters.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q, p  
and spaces. To enter a space,  
press [Space] (the first character  
cannot be a space).  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or {Stop}  
key and try again.  
C Press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
Make sure that the ID you enter  
conforms with the specifica-  
tions of the other party's fax ma-  
chine.  
When entering the SID  
(Password) is necessary  
A Enter the code for "SID" with  
the number key.  
Note  
To cancel the operation, press  
[Cancel] and the display will re-  
turn to standby mode menu.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
File Reserve Report (Polling Re-  
ception)  
G Press the {Start} key.  
See p.21 File Reserve Report  
(Polling Reception).  
Note  
When in Immediate Transmis-  
sion, if the other party does not  
support this function, an error  
message appears on the display.  
Make sure that the ID you enter  
SEP/PWD (SEP Code Polling  
Transmission)  
p.22 Polling Transmission”  
p.19 Polling Reception”  
3
p.251 Information Boxes”  
Normally you can only use Polling  
Transmission/Reception between fax  
machines of the same make that have  
the Polling Transmission/Reception  
feature. However, if the other ma-  
chine supports a similar feature  
called SEP/PWD, you can send faxes  
or receive messages using this polling  
method instead.  
p.63 Quick Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
p.76 Speed Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
p.87 Groups, <Basic Features>  
p.136 Program/Delete Menu”  
A Press [Mode].  
You can also use SEP Code Polling  
Transmission to retrieve documents  
stored in information boxes regis-  
tered in other fax machines.  
You need to assign the Dial Op-  
tions feature to a User Function  
key beforehand. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
The Transmission Mode menu ap-  
pears.  
Note  
The ID can be up to 20 digits long  
and consist of digits, spaces, p  
and q.  
B Enter the code for "Polling RX"  
with the number keys.  
You can also store the SEP Codes  
in addition to the other parties  
names and fax numbers in Quick  
Dial keys, Speed Dials, or Key  
Stroke Programs.  
Note  
If "Polling RX" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is.  
Messages you send using this fea-  
File Reserve Report (Memory  
Transmission)  
See p.107 File Reserve Report  
(Memory Transmission).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Handy Dialing Functions  
C Press 0 or 1 key to select "De- G Enter the code for "SEP" with the  
fault ID", and then press [OK].  
number keys.  
H Enter the SEP code with the num-  
ber keys, then press [OK].  
3
The Transmission Mode menu is  
shown. A check mark is added to  
Polling Reception.  
D Press [Exit].  
Note  
Make sure to enter the same SEP  
code that is stored in the Infor-  
mation Box of the other parties'.  
You can enter up to 20 charac-  
ters.  
The Polling Reception menu is  
shown.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q, p  
and spaces. To enter a space,  
press [Space] (the first character  
cannot be a space).  
Note  
"Polling RX" appears.  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or {Stop}  
key and try again.  
E Dial the destination fax number  
using the number keys.  
Make sure that the ID you enter  
conforms with the specifica-  
tions of the other party's fax ma-  
chine.  
F Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) assigned with the Dial  
Options feature.  
When a password (PWD) is  
necessary  
A Enter the code for "PWD" with  
the number keys.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
B Enter the PWD code then press  
[OK].  
Sub-address  
The optional ISDN Unit is required to  
use this function  
ISDN allows two or more terminals  
(such as a fax and digital telephone)  
to be connected to a single line. These  
terminals are identified by their sub-  
address numbers. If the terminals  
connected to the line at a destination  
are assigned sub-addresses, dialing a  
sub-address allows you to direct your  
fax message to one or more particular  
terminals at the destination.  
3
Note  
You can enter up to 20 char-  
acters.  
You can enter digits 0-9, q,  
p and spaces. To enter a  
space, press [Space] (the first  
character cannot be a space).  
You need to assign the Sub-ad-  
dress feature to a User Function  
key beforehand. See p.154 User  
Function Keys”  
If you incorrectly enter the  
code, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
Limitation  
Make sure that the ID you  
enter conforms with the  
specifications of the other  
party's fax machine.  
Sub-address can only be used with  
ISDN.  
Note  
I Press [OK].  
You can program a sub-address  
number in a Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial.  
A Select G4 or ISDN-G3.  
Note  
Reference  
p.89 Selecting the Line”  
To cancel the operation, press  
[Cancel] and the display will re-  
turn to standby mode menu.  
B Set the original and select any  
J Press the {Start} key.  
scan settings you require.  
The connection is established and  
the reception starts.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Handy Dialing Functions  
C Dial the fax number with the  
UUI  
number keys.  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
It allows G4 faxes with the UUI (User-  
User Information) feature to make  
Transfer Requests to this machine us-  
ing UUI instead of a push signal.  
D Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) in which the Sub-ad-  
dress function has been regis-  
tered.  
3
You need to store the Tone (UUI)  
function in a User Function key be-  
forehand. See p.154 User Func-  
tion Keys.  
Limitation  
UUI is only available with ISDN.  
"/" appears on the display.  
Note  
You can store UUI code in a Quick  
Dial key or Speed Dial.  
A Select G4 or I-G3 line.  
E Enter the destination sub-address  
with the number keys.  
Reference  
F Press the {Start} key.  
p.89 Selecting the Line”  
B Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
C Enter the fax number.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other Transmission Features  
D Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) in which the Tone func-  
tion has been registered.  
"" appears after the fax number  
you entered.  
3
E Enter the UUI code with the num-  
ber keys.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On Hook Dial  
On Hook Dial  
You can send a fax message without  
lifting the receiver, while still listen-  
ing to the dial tone.  
C Dial.  
When a connection is made to anoth-  
er fax machine (you will hear a high-  
pitched tone), press the {Start} key.  
The fax number you enter is dialed  
immediately.  
Note  
You cannot use this feature with  
the optional Extra G3 Interface  
Unit.  
3
Note  
If you misdial the number, press  
the {Stop} key, {On Hook Dial} or  
{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key  
and return to step B.  
You can adjust the volume of the  
justing Volume, <Basic Features>.  
Press 0 or 1 key to adjust the  
The On Hook Dial function is also  
available with ISDN. See p.86 Us-  
ing On Hook Dial with ISDN.  
Reference  
p.46 Dialing, <Basic Features>  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
p.75 Handy Dialing Func-  
tions”  
B Press the {On Hook Dial} key.  
D When a connection is made to an-  
other fax machine (you will hear a  
high-pitched tone), press the  
{Start} key.  
Transmission starts.  
After transmission the machine  
will return to the standby mode.  
You will hear a dial tone from the  
machine's internal speaker.  
Note  
If you wish to cancel transmis-  
sion while it is in progress, press  
the {Stop} key then remove the  
document.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other Transmission Features  
B Dial the fax number.  
Using On Hook Dial with ISDN  
This feature requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
When only connected to an ISDN  
line, the On Hook Dial feature be-  
comes available for ISDN.  
Limitation  
Do not pause for more than 5  
seconds between dialing digits.  
If more than 5 seconds passes,  
transmission will start automat-  
ically.  
The following example describes how  
to use this feature to connect to a fax  
information service.  
3
Note  
You need to set the "Selecting the  
line for On Hook Dial" to "ISDN"  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 21 bit  
0).  
If you incorrectly enter the  
number, press the {On Hook Di-  
al} key, the {Stop} key or the  
{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key  
and perform the operation  
again.  
Note  
When ISDN is selected for the On  
Hook Dial, the optional handset or  
an external telephone can only be  
used for making phone calls. You  
Manual Dial function or receive  
faxes with the Telephone Mode.  
See p.88 Manual Dialand p.113  
Telephone Mode.  
You can also enter the sub-ad-  
dress and UUI. The correct in-  
put sequence is as follows: "Fax  
number" "/" "Sub-address" ""  
"UUI"  
Press 0 to 1 key to adjust the  
Reference  
p.82 Sub-address”  
A Press the {On Hook Dial} key.  
p.83 UUI”  
C Press [Dialing].  
Note  
Transmission will begin auto-  
matically 5 seconds after enter-  
ing the fax number.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
On Hook Dial  
D Follow the instructions provided  
by the other party.  
E When you hear a message such as  
"Please press the start button",  
press the {Start} key.  
After a while, reception will begin.  
When reception has finished, the  
machine will return to the standby  
mode.  
3
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
Manual Dial  
The optional handset or an external telephone is required to use this function.  
Pick up the handset or the external  
C Dial.  
telephone and dial. When the line is  
connected and you hear a high-  
pitched tone, press the {Start} key to  
send your fax message. If, on the oth-  
er hand, you hear a voice at the other  
end, continue your conversation as  
you would normally over the tele-  
phone.  
The fax number you enter is dialed  
immediately.  
3
Note  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the  
number, replace the external  
telephone and try again from  
step B.  
Manual Dial does not work with  
ISDN lines.  
Results of transmissions with this  
feature are not mentioned in the  
Transmission Result Report.  
Reference  
p.46 Dialing, <Basic Features>  
You can specify destination with  
the number keys, Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial.  
p.75 Handy Dialing Func-  
tions”  
While using the optional handset  
or an external telephone, you can  
store the fax documents for the  
Memory Transmission if "Storing  
fax documents for the Memory  
Transmission while using the  
Manual Dial function" is set to "En-  
ever, while this feature is set to  
"Disable", you cannot transmit fax-  
es using the Manual Dial function.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 09 bit 4).  
D When the line is connected and  
you hear a high-pitched tone,  
press the {Start} key to send your  
fax message, and replace the  
handset of the external telephone.  
Transmission starts.  
After transmission the machine  
will return to the standby mode.  
If you lift the handset immediately  
after the machine switches to  
Night Timer mode, there will be no  
sound for a maximum of 4 sec-  
onds. When you can hear sound  
again, you can continue.  
Note  
If someone picks up the phone at  
the other end, ask them to do what  
is necessary to receive the fax.  
If you wish to cancel transmis-  
sion while it is in progress, press  
the {Stop} key then remove the  
original.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Pick up the external telephone.  
You will hear a dial tone.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting the Line  
Selecting the Line  
This feature requires the optional Extra G3 Interface Unit or the optional ISDN Unit.  
Installing all of these options expands  
the machine's line capacity to a maxi-  
mum of 3 lines.  
You can set the default G3 line or  
expanded G3 line as the PABX line  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 13 bit  
The optional Extra G3 Interface Unit  
connects to the PSTN, the optional  
ISDN Unit to the ISDN.  
The On Hook Dial function is not  
available with the lines expanded  
by the optional units. See p.85 On  
Hook Dial.  
3
Note  
Only one PSTN line is available  
with the base machine without any  
options installed.  
Your machine may not respond to  
a transmission received through  
an ISDN PBX, detecting it as a tele-  
phone call, not as a fax message.  
You can set "Respond to a trans-  
mission received through an ISDN  
PBX unconditionally" to "On" with  
User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters(switch 13 bit 6).  
Up to three lines can be used si-  
multaneously.  
One ISDN line allows you to com-  
municate with two communica-  
tion lines, however, if connected  
through PBX, you may only be  
able to use one communication  
line.  
The table for the available combi-  
nation of the connected line type(s)  
and the communication type(s) is  
as follows:  
The optional Extra G3 Interface  
Unit can be connected to a PSTN  
line.  
The optional Extra G3 Interface  
Unit can be for reception exclusive  
use. To change the setups, please  
contact your service representa-  
tive.  
Option  
Compo-  
nent(s)  
Connected Available  
Line  
Type(s)  
Communi-  
cation  
Type(s)  
Base  
Machine  
PSTN  
G3  
The optional ISDN Unit can be  
Base Ma-  
PSTN +  
G3 + G3  
connected to an ISDN line.  
chine + Op- PSTN  
tional Extra (Option)  
G3Interface  
When sending a fax and choosing  
the line, you can only specify desti-  
nations with the number keys and  
the Chain Dial feature.  
Unit  
Base Ma-  
PSTN +  
G3 + G4  
The following display is shown  
when neither the optional Extra G3  
Interface Unit or optional ISDN  
Unit is installed.  
chine + Op- ISDN  
tional ISDN (Option)  
Unit  
I-G3 + G4  
G3 + G4 +  
G4  
G4 + G4  
ISDN  
(Option)  
I-G3 + G4  
G4 + G4  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Other Transmission Features  
G3  
Option  
Compo-  
nent(s)  
Connected Available  
Line  
Type(s)  
Communi-  
cation  
G3 is selected by default after pow-  
er on and a reset.  
If the G3 indicator is not lit, press  
the {Line Selection} key until it is.  
Depending on the settings, either  
PSTN or ISDN is selected.  
Type(s)  
Base Ma-  
chine + Op- PSTN  
tional Extra (Option)  
G3Interface  
PSTN +  
G3 + G3  
PSTN +  
G3 + G4  
Unit + Op-  
ISDN  
G3 + I-G3  
I-G3 + G4  
tional ISDN  
(Option)  
Unit  
G3 + G4 +  
G4  
3
G3 + I-G3 +  
G4  
Auto Display  
G3-1 Display  
G3-2 Display  
ISDN-G3 Display  
I-G3 + I-G3  
ISDN  
(Option)  
I-G3 + G4  
I-G3 + I-G3  
G4 + G4  
PSTN +  
PSTN  
(Option) +  
ISDN  
G3 + G3 +  
G4  
G3 + G4 +  
G4  
(Option)  
I-G3 + I-G3  
G3 + I-G3 +  
G4  
I-G3 : G3 communication using  
ISDN (ISDN-G3)  
When holding more than one com-  
munication at one time, the infor-  
mation of the first communication  
established is shown on the dis-  
play.  
Up to three communications can  
be held at one time.  
You can send two faxes and re-  
ceive one simultaneously.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Line  
G4  
Auto Discriminate  
Press the {Line Selection} key to  
light the G4 indicator. ISDN is se-  
This function is for when G4 is select-  
ed. The machine first dials using G4,  
but if the destination is PSTN, it  
switches automatically to G3.  
lected.  
Limitation  
This function requires the optional  
ISDN Unit.  
G4 Display  
3
Note  
When the destination G3 uses TA  
(Terminal Adapter) or is attached  
to a PBX, and connected to ISDN, it  
is detected as G4 and the machine  
does not switch to G3.  
PABX  
Depending on the signals of the in-  
ternational lines, the Auto Dis-  
criminate function cannot detect  
the correct line type, thus trans-  
missions to overseas destinations  
may not be made.  
Press the {Line Selection} key to  
light the PABX indicator.  
How to Select the Line  
G3 Line Selection  
When the optional Extra G3 Interface  
Unit or optional ISDN Unit is in-  
stalled, you can store the Line Select  
function in one of the User Function  
keys ({F1} to {F10}).  
G4 communication always uses IS-  
DN, but G3 communication can  
use either PSTN or ISDN. There-  
fore, when connected to both  
PSTN and ISDN and selecting G3,  
you can choose which line to use.  
When sending a fax, pressing the  
User Function key enables you to se-  
lect the line.  
Note  
When the optional ISDN Unit is  
installed, the line type for "Au-  
to" is set to PSTN by default. If  
you wish to change the settings,  
please contact your service rep-  
resentative.  
Preparation  
Store the Line Select function in a  
User Function key ({F1} to {F10}).  
See p.154 User Function Keys.  
When using G3 with ISDN, you  
can use the sub-address and  
UUI.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Other Transmission Features  
A Make sure that the G3 indicator is  
lit.  
B Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) with the Line Select  
function stored in.  
3
C Press 0 or 1 key to select the  
line.  
D Press [OK].  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Features  
Transmission Features  
Stamp  
Auto Reduction  
When sending a fax message, the ma-  
chine can stamp a circle mark at the  
bottom of the document. This stamp  
indicates that the document has been  
successfully stored in memory for  
Memory Transmission, or that it has  
been successfully sent for Immediate  
Transmission.  
If the other party's fax machine does  
not have paper loaded of the same  
width as your document, use this fea-  
ture to have your document image re-  
duced to a suitable width during  
transmission.  
3
Transmitter  
(This machine)  
Receiver  
A B  
A B  
Reduction  
A
GFREDU0N  
Important  
GFSTMP1N  
If you turn this feature off, the  
scale of the document is main-  
tained and some parts of the image  
may be lost when printed at the  
other end.  
Each time you press the {F3 Stamp}  
key, the indicator light is turned on  
and off. Turn it on or off if you wish  
this function to work.  
Note  
If a page was not stamped even  
though the Stamp feature is turned  
on, you need to resend that page.  
If you use this feature often, you  
can adjust User Parameters so that  
the home setting is on. In this case,  
Stamp can easily be turned off for  
any single transmission by press-  
ing the {F3 Stamp} key. See p.178  
0).  
GFREDU1N  
Note  
You can switch this feature on and  
off with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
07 bit 3).  
When the stamp starts getting  
lighter, replace the cartridge. See  
p.234 Enter the code for "Program  
Sender" with the number keys..  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Other Transmission Features  
ID Transmission  
Duplex Original Settings  
If you use this feature, transmission is  
limited to destination machines of the  
same make and with the same stored  
Polling ID. This is useful when send-  
ing documents containing confiden-  
tial or sensitive information.  
This feature lets you scan in each side  
of a double-sided original, then have  
both sides sent in a single operation.  
You need to store the Duplex Orig-  
inal function in a User Function  
key beforehand. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
Preparation  
You need to program the Polling  
ID beforehand. See p.199 Regis-  
tering ID Codes.  
3
Limitation  
This feature is only available with  
Memory Transmission.  
Limitation  
ID Transmission is not available  
Document bypass tray is not avail-  
with the following functions:  
able with this feature.  
Polling Transmission  
See p.22 Polling Transmis-  
sion.  
Note  
You cannot send duplex originals  
using Parallel Memory Transmis-  
sion.  
Backup File Transmission  
See p.102 Backup File Trans-  
mission.  
A Make sure the Memory Transmis-  
sion indicator is lit.  
Note  
You can turn this feature on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 06 bit  
2).  
Note  
If it is not, press the {Transmis-  
sion Mode} key.  
B Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) with the Duplex Origi-  
nal function stored in.  
C Set the double-sided original  
with the front page face-up.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transmission Features  
Note  
D Select any scan settings as neces-  
sary.  
If you press [Yes], all scanned  
data is deleted.  
E Dial the destination number.  
If you press [No], transmission  
of the scanned data starts.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
If you do not press either [Yes]  
or [No] for a while, the file will  
be deleted automatically and  
the following display appears.  
Scanning the front page will begin.  
When scanning has finished, the  
following display appears:  
3
G Set the original with the back  
When the memory runs out  
while scanning the front page  
(the first page), the file will be  
deleted and the following dis-  
play appears.  
page face-up.  
Note  
Set the document within 60 sec-  
onds. If time runs out, an error  
will occur and transmission will  
not take place.  
H Press the {Start} key.  
Transmission starts.  
If a Document Jam Occurs  
If Memory Runs out While Scanning Is in  
Progress  
A Check the message on the dis-  
play, then press [OK].  
Scanning of documents is interrupted  
if the machine's memory runs out (the  
remaining amount of memory de-  
creases to 0%) while scanning and  
storing the documents data is in  
progress.  
B Remove the document.  
Reference  
p.108 Clearing Original  
Jams, <Basic Features>  
A When the memory runs out while  
scanning the back page (the sec-  
ond page), the following display  
appears.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other Transmission Features  
B Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) that the Batch Original  
Documents Transmission func-  
tion is stored in.  
Batch Original Documents  
Transmission  
When sending a fax message which  
has a large number of pages, you can  
divide and scan the original docu-  
ments in parts to store in the memory,  
and then send the whole data in one  
transmission.  
C Set the first stack of documents.  
Preparation  
3
Note  
Before you can use the Batch Orig-  
inal Documents Transmission  
function, you need to program this  
function into a User Function key  
({F1} to {F10}). See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
You can set up to 30 pages  
(11"×17"), 40 pages (81/2"×14"),  
or 75 pages (81/2"×11") of docu-  
ments at one time.  
D Select any scan settings as neces-  
Limitation  
sary.  
The Immediate Transmission is  
not available. Use Memory Trans-  
mission.  
E Dial the destination number.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
You cannot use the Document By-  
pass Tray to feed the documents  
when using this function.  
The machine starts scanning the  
documents.  
When the scanning of the set docu-  
ments is complete, the screen be-  
low appears.  
Note  
You cannot send batch document  
data using Parallel Memory Trans-  
mission.  
A Make sure the Memory Transmis-  
sion indicator is lit.  
Important  
Do not attempt to add more  
documents into the feeder while  
the scanning is in progress. Do-  
ing so may result in a document  
jam.  
Note  
G Set the next stack of documents.  
If it is not, press the {Transmis-  
sion Mode} key.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission Features  
H Press the {Start} key.  
If Memory Runs out While Scanning Is in  
Progress  
When the machine finishes scan-  
ning the set documents, the screen  
below appears.  
Scanning of documents is interrupted  
if the machine's memory runs out (the  
remaining amount of memory de-  
creases to 0%) while scanning and  
storing the documents data is in  
progress.  
Note  
A Select whether or not to delete the  
If you have more documents to  
be scanned, repeat the proce-  
dure from G.  
3
stored document data.  
I When you finish scanning all  
documents, press the {q} key.  
Transmission starts.  
If Scanning Fails  
Scanning of documents is interrupted  
if the machine fails to scan some of  
the documents and store the docu-  
ment data.  
Note  
If you press [Yes], all scanned  
data is deleted.  
If you press [No], transmission  
of the scanned data starts.  
A Select whether or not to delete the  
stored document data.  
If a Document Jam Occurs  
A Check the message on the dis-  
play, then press [OK].  
B Remove the document.  
Note  
If you press [Yes], all scanned  
Reference  
p.108 Clearing Original  
Jams, <Basic Features>  
data is deleted.  
If you press [No], transmission  
of the scanned data starts.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Other Transmission Features  
Note  
Label Insertion  
This feature does not work with  
the following function and condi-  
tion:  
With this feature you can have the re-  
ceiver's name programmed in Quick  
Dial key or Speed Dial printed on the  
message when it is received at the  
other end. The name will be printed  
at the top of the page and will be pre-  
ceded by "TO:".  
Transfer Request  
When transmitting the fax with  
the Fax Header Print function  
"Off"  
See p.32 Fax Header Print.  
If you program the Label insertion  
feature in a Quick Dial key or Speed  
Dial, the feature is enabled when you  
select "On". This feature cannot be  
used if the other party's name is not  
programmed.  
3
Reference  
p.10 User Code Transmission”  
User Code (the name of the Personal  
Box) will be printed preceded by  
"FROM:" as well as the name of the re-  
ceiver when sending faxes with User  
Code (SUB Code of the Personal Box)  
using User Code Transmission to re-  
ceivers whose Label Insertion setting  
is "On" in your machine.  
p.246 Personal Boxes”  
p.63 Quick Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
p.76 Speed Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
Inserting a Label Using Auto Document  
SEP. 1.2002 9:15AM  
ABC COMPANY  
NO.005  
P.  
1
The Label Insertion function is available  
with the documents stored as Labels  
with the Auto Document function. See  
p.145 Registering Auto Documents.  
TO:SEATTLE OFFICE  
FROM:DEF  
1
2
User Code (the name of the Personal  
Box) will be printed preceded by  
"FROM:" as well as the name of the re-  
ceiver when sending faxes with User  
Code (SUB Code of the Personal Box)  
using User Code Transmission to re-  
ceivers whose Label Insertion setting  
is "On" in your machine.  
GFATEN1N  
1. The name stored in the Quick Dial  
key or Speed Dial  
2. The name of the user (the name of  
the Personal Box)  
Important  
If you turn this function on, any  
images located where the name of  
the receiver to be printed will be  
erased.  
SEP. 1.2002 9:15AM  
ABC COMPANY  
NO.005  
P.  
1
TO:SEATTLE OFFICE  
FROM:DEF  
1
2
GFATEN1N  
1. The name stored in the Quick Dial  
key or Speed Dial  
2. The name of the user (the name of  
the Personal Box)  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Transmission Features  
Preparation  
D Specify the destination fax num-  
ber with the Label Insertion is  
"On" in one of the following  
ways:  
In order to have the receiver's  
the document in memory and reg-  
ister the name of the receiver be-  
forehand. See p.145 Registering  
Auto Documents.  
Press the Quick Dial key that  
the destination fax number is  
stored in.  
Press the {Speed Dial} key and  
enter the code of the Speed Dial  
that the destination fax number  
is stored in.  
Note  
Although you can specify scan set-  
tings when sending an Auto Docu-  
ment, these settings will only  
apply to the document you send  
along with the Auto Document.  
The settings used when you  
scanned in and stored the Auto  
Document will apply to the Auto  
Document itself.  
3
E Press the {Start} key.  
A Set the original you wish to send  
along with the Label, and select  
any scan settings as necessary.  
Auto Document  
This feature allows you to automati-  
cally attach the registered document  
as the first page to the original you  
wish to transmit. It is handy to store  
Labels or maps beforehand to use this  
function.  
B Specify the Label to send in one  
of the following ways:  
Press the Quick Dial key that  
the Label is stored in.  
Press the {Speed Dial} key and  
enter the code of the Speed Dial  
that the Label is stored in.  
You can send an Auto Document  
along with another document, or just  
send it on its own.  
C Press [Yes].  
Preparation  
ments or images to be sent along  
with the original using this feature  
in advance. See p.145 Registering  
Auto Documents.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Other Transmission Features  
Note  
Note  
Although you can specify scan set-  
tings when sending an Auto Docu-  
ment, these settings will only  
apply to the document you send  
along with the Auto Document.  
The settings used when you  
scanned in and stored the Auto  
Document will apply to the Auto  
Document itself.  
Proceed to step E when you  
specified the destination using a  
Quick Dial key or a Speed Dial.  
D Dial the destination fax number.  
If you send another document  
with an Auto Document, the Auto  
Document is sent first.  
3
E Press the {Start} key.  
No Document, No Dial  
Reference  
p.63 Quick Dial, <Basic Fea-  
If you dial a destination fax number  
and for some reason take your docu-  
ment back to your desk and another  
person sets a different document,  
their document could be sent to the  
wrong destination. To avoid such  
mistakes, when this feature is turned  
on, you cannot dial a destination un-  
less your document is set.  
tures>  
p.76 Speed Dial, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
A Set the original you wish to send  
along with the Auto Document,  
and select any scan settings as  
necessary.  
To send just an Auto Document,  
start the following procedure from  
step B.  
Note  
The standby screen when this fea-  
ture is turned on:  
B Specify the Auto Document to  
send in one of the following  
ways:  
Press the Quick Dial key it is  
stored in.  
When the machine is shipped, this  
feature is turned off by default. If  
you wish to turn this feature on,  
please contact your service repre-  
sentative.  
Press the {Speed Dial} key and  
enter the code of the Speed Dial  
it is stored in.  
C Press [Yes].  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Transmission Features  
Blank Sheet Detect  
Scanner Cleaning Message  
This feature is designed to help you  
avoid making mistakes while scan-  
ning in documents.  
If dirt is stuck to the scanner, the other  
party receives fax messages with  
black lines. When the scanner is dirty,  
the warning message "Scanner  
needs cleaning. Clean the expo-  
sure glass." is displayed after scan-  
ning is complete. If this message is  
displayed, wipe the exposure glass  
and white strip to remove the dirt,  
and then press [OK].  
If you try to scan in an almost com-  
pletely blank document, an alarm  
sounds after Immediate Transmis-  
sion, and as soon as the document has  
been scanned for Memory Transmis-  
sion.  
3
As the alarm sounds, the screen be-  
low appears.  
Note  
You can select whether this mes-  
machine detects that the scanner is  
dirty with User Parameters. "On"  
(Displayed) is selected by default.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 20 bit 7).  
Limitation  
This feature is not supported in  
Copy mode.  
Note  
Transmission is not cancelled even  
if the machine detects the docu-  
ment is blank.  
If the dirty part of the scanner is  
small, that is, 0.127 mm (0.005 in.)  
or smaller, the machine tries to  
erase the black line made when  
scanning originals. The black line  
is less visible on the received mes-  
sage. However, sometimes very  
small parts of the image might be  
missing on the received message.  
You can turn this function on or off  
with User Parameters. It is turned  
on by default. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 20 bit 4).  
When in Memory Transmission,  
you can cancel the transmission by  
message is shown on the display.  
You can turn Blank Sheet Detect on  
or off with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
11 bit 2).  
Transmission is not interrupted  
even if the machine detects that the  
scanner is dirty.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Other Transmission Features  
Backup File Transmission  
JBIG Transmission  
When turned on, this feature sends a  
backup copy of all faxes you send to  
destinations that you specify.  
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image  
Experts Group) compression you can  
send photographic documents at  
high speed.  
Normally, the JBIG method is used  
when sending to other fax machines.  
However, if connected to multiple  
lines and another JBIG transmission  
is in progress, transmission takes  
place without using JBIG.  
You must specify the backup desti-  
nations beforehand. See p.243  
Backup File Transmission Set-  
tings.  
3
Note  
This function works with the fol-  
lowing features:  
Limitation  
This feature requires that the other  
party's fax machine has both the  
JBIG function and ECM function  
(G3 communication only).  
Memory Transmission  
See p.34 Memory Transmis-  
sion, <Basic Features>.  
When connected to multiple lines  
and a JBIG transmission is in  
progress, JBIG transmission is not  
possible until that transmission  
has finished.  
See p.28 Transfer Request.  
Messages.  
This feature is not available with  
an e-mail transmission when NIC  
FAX Unit (Option for Type1) in-  
stalled.  
SUB Code Transmission  
See p.13 SUB Code Transmis-  
sion with the Mode Key.  
Mail Transmission (NIC FAX  
Unit (Option for Type1) re-  
quired)  
Reference  
p.42 Scan Settings, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
More Transmission Functions  
More Transmission Functions  
The following functions are useful  
when transmitting documents.  
Checking the Transmission  
Result  
If Memory Runs out While  
Scanning Is in Progress  
You can confirm successful transmis-  
sion with the Communication Result  
Report or the Communication Failure  
Report for Memory Transmission,  
and the Immediate Transmission Re-  
sult Report for Immediate Transmis-  
sion.  
Scanning of documents is interrupted  
if the machine's memory runs out (the  
remaining amount of memory de-  
creases to 0%) while scanning and  
storing the document data is in  
progress. However, the documents  
already scanned in are transmitted.  
3
Communication Result Report  
Turn on the Communication Re-  
sult Report if you want a report to  
be printed after every transmis-  
sion.  
Note  
We recommend that you use Im-  
mediate Transmission to send a lot  
of documents when the percentage  
of free memory space is low.  
Communication Failure Report  
If you turn the Communication re-  
sult Report off, the Communica-  
tion Failure Report will be printed  
when a communication fails.  
When the memory runs out, the  
following display appears:  
Immediate Transmission Result Re-  
port  
Turn on the Immediate Transmis-  
sion Result Report if you want a re-  
port to be printed after every  
successful Immediate Transmis-  
sion.  
If a document jam occurs, the fol-  
lowing display appears. Check the  
message on the display, press [OK],  
then remove the document:  
Note  
tion result on the display. See p.44  
Checking the Transmission Re-  
sult (TX Status)and p.45 Check-  
ing the Reception Result (RX  
Status).  
The communication result of  
Memory Transmission or Immedi-  
ate Transmission can be printed on  
the Journal. See p.50 Printing the  
Journal.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Other Transmission Features  
Note  
Broadcasting Sequence  
This feature requires the optional  
Extra G3 Interface Unit or the op-  
tional ISDN Unit.  
If you dial several destinations for the  
same message (Broadcasting), the  
messages are sent in the order in  
which they were dialed. If the docu-  
ment could not be transmitted, the  
machine redials that destination after  
the last destination specified for  
Broadcasting. For example, if you  
specify four destinations, A through  
D for Broadcasting, and if the lines to  
destinations A and C are busy, the  
machine dials the destinations in the  
following order: A, B, C, D, A, and C.  
Up to two lines can be used simul-  
taneously. When the optional Ex-  
tra G3 Interface Unit is installed, it  
is more efficient to set the line type  
of the destination to "Auto" so that  
the transmission is made with the  
available G3 line.  
3
Sending a Fax Message  
Immediately  
Note  
When you wish to send a fax straight  
away, use Immediate Transmission.  
The dialing order mentioned  
above does not apply in the Batch  
Transmission mode.  
If a Memory Transmission is in  
progress, the display will switch to  
transmission standby and as soon as  
the current transmission has finished,  
the Immediate Transmission will  
start automatically.  
For details about Broadcasting, see  
p.29 Transmission Modes, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
If you are already sending to more  
than one destination with Memory  
Transmission and your document has  
already been scanned in, Broadcast-  
ing is interrupted to allow the Imme-  
diate Transmission to be sent.  
Simultaneous Broadcast  
Normally, if you dial several destina-  
tions, the messages are sent in the or-  
der in which they were dialed.  
However, with this feature, you can  
send messages to more than one des-  
tination simultaneously, using sepa-  
rate communication lines.  
However, if a transmission other than  
the current transmission is on stand-  
by, that document is sent first causing  
your Immediate Transmission to take  
a little longer.  
You can complete the entire transmis-  
sion in a shorter time with this feature  
than with Broadcasting.  
Broadcasting: Checking  
Progress  
To check which destinations the fax  
message has been sent to so far, print  
the TX File List. See p.43 Printing a  
List of Files in Memory (Print TX File  
List).  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
More Transmission Functions  
Automatic Redial  
Dual Access  
If a document cannot be transmitted  
because the line is busy or due to a  
transmission error, redialing is done  
twice at 5-minute intervals for Imme-  
diate Transmission, and four times at  
5-minute intervals for Memory Trans-  
mission. (The redialing interval and  
number of retries may vary according  
to country.)  
The machine can scan other messages  
into memory even while sending a  
fax message from memory, receiving  
a message into memory, or automati-  
cally printing a report.  
Since the machine starts sending the  
second message immediately after  
the current transmission terminates,  
the line will be used efficiently.  
3
If redialing fails, the machine cancels  
the transmission and prints the Com-  
munication Result Report or Commu-  
nication Failure Report.  
Note that during Immediate Trans-  
mission, when copying, or when the  
User Tools menu is open, the machine  
cannot scan in documents.  
Batch Transmission  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
If you send a fax message by Memory  
Transmission and there is another fax  
message waiting in memory to be  
sent to the same destination, that  
message is sent along with your doc-  
ument. Several fax messages can be  
sent with a single call, thus eliminat-  
ing the need for several separate calls.  
This helps you reduce communica-  
tion costs and transmission time.  
This feature automatically resends  
data that wasn't transmitted success-  
fully using a system that complies  
with international standards.  
ECM requires that the destination  
machine has the same feature.  
Parallel Memory Transmission  
With this feature the machine can call  
destinations while scanning docu-  
ments. Compared with normal Mem-  
ory Transmission (where the machine  
calls once all the documents have  
been stored), it is quick to verify  
whether a connection has been made  
or not.  
Fax messages for which the transmis-  
sion time has been set in advance are  
sent by Batch Transmission when that  
time is reached.  
Note  
You can switch the Batch Trans-  
mission function on or off with  
User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters(switch 06 bit 4).  
Additionally, as scanning finishes  
quicker than in Immediate Transmis-  
sion, it is useful if you wish to take the  
document back to your desk immedi-  
ately. However, if the connection can-  
not be made (for example if the line is  
busy), normal Memory Transmission  
takes place.  
If you store the Batch Transmission  
function in a User Function key,  
you can turn it on or off by just  
pressing that key. The User Func-  
tion key indicator lights when  
Batch Transmission is turned on.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Other Transmission Features  
Limitation  
Parallel Memory Transmission is  
not available with G4.  
Note  
Standard Memory Transmission is  
used instead of Parallel Memory  
Transmission in the following cas-  
es:  
When the line is busy and could  
not be connected to  
3
With Send Later  
When you store a document for  
Memory Transmission while  
another communication is in  
progress  
When you send just an Auto  
Document  
With Duplex Original  
With Batch Original Documents  
Transmission  
When the amount of remaining  
memory drops below a certain lev-  
el, the machine switches to ordi-  
nary memory transmission and the  
parallel memory transmission fea-  
ture is disabled until more memo-  
ry becomes available.  
If you press the {Stop} key, the  
document jams, or memory be-  
comes full during Parallel Memory  
Transmission, the machine stops  
transmitting and prints the Com-  
munication Result Report (Memo-  
ry Transmission). The file is  
erased.  
You can switch the Parallel Memo-  
ry Transmission function on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 07 bit  
2).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed Reports  
Printed Reports  
File Reserve Report (Memory  
Transmission)  
Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission)  
This report is printed after a docu-  
ment is stored in memory. It helps  
you review the contents and regis-  
tered destinations of documents  
stored for transmission.  
This report is printed when a Memo-  
ry Transmission is completed, so you  
can check the result of the transmis-  
sion. If two or more destinations are  
specified, the report is printed after  
the fax message has been sent to all  
the destinations. If the machine is set  
message could not be successfully  
transmitted, the Communication Fail-  
ure Report is printed. See p.108  
Communication Failure Report.  
3
Note  
This report is not printed for mes-  
Transmission.  
You can turn this report on and off.  
By default it is not printed. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
03 bit 2).  
Note  
the communication result. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
Even if the machine is set up not to  
print this report, it is still printed if  
a document could not be stored.  
You can turn this report on and off.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 03 bit 0).  
You can choose whether to include  
part of the document image on the  
report (part of the image is printed  
by default). This feature is not  
available for Confidential Trans-  
mission. See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 04 bit 7).  
You can program a User Function  
key to switch Communication Re-  
sult Report printing on or off for  
each transmission. After the trans-  
mission completes, it reverts to the  
setting with User Parameters.  
When the User Function key is lit,  
the report is printed for each trans-  
mission. See p.154 User Function  
Keys.  
With User Parameters, you can set  
the machine to print out this report  
when scanning documents is inter-  
rupted because the machine's  
memory runs out, or if a document  
jam occurs. See p.178 User Param-  
eters(switch 04 bit 6).  
You can choose whether to include  
part of the document image on the  
report (part of the image is printed  
by default). This feature is not  
available for Confidential Trans-  
mission. See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 04 bit 7).  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Other Transmission Features  
Normally, when specifying the  
destination with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial, "ADDRESS" on this  
report shows Own Name or Own  
Fax Number registered in the re-  
ceiver's machine. However, you  
can change the setting with User  
number of the destination stored  
in the Quick Dial key or Speed Dial  
in your machine is printed instead.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 04 bit 4).  
Transmission Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission)  
If you turn this report on, a report will  
be printed after every Immediate  
Transmission so you have a record of  
whether the transmission was suc-  
cessful or not.  
Note  
You can switch this report on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 03 bit  
5).  
3
Communication Failure Report  
You can program a User Function  
key to switch Communication Re-  
sult Report printing on or off for  
each transmission. After the trans-  
mission completes, it reverts to the  
setting made with User Parame-  
ters. When the User Function key  
is lit, the report is printed for each  
transmission. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
This report is printed if a memory  
transmission failure occurs after a job  
is completed. It is only printed if the  
Communication Result Report is  
switched off, and a communication  
failure occurs.  
Note  
You can choose whether to include  
part of the document image on the  
report. See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 04 bit 7).  
Normally, when specifying the  
destination with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial, "ADDRESS" on this  
report shows Own Name or Own  
Fax Number registered in the re-  
ceiver's machine. However, you  
can change the setting with User  
number of the destination stored  
in the Quick Dial key or Speed Dial  
in your machine is printed instead.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 04 bit 4).  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Reception Features  
General  
There are two types of reception  
methods, Immediate Reception and  
Memory Reception.  
Immediate Reception  
Each page of a received fax message is  
printed as soon as it is received. This  
method is used for standard fax mes-  
sages.  
Normally, the machine receives all  
the faxes with Immediate Reception,  
Reception (see p.46 Printing a Confi-  
dential Message) receiving Memory-  
locked messages (see p.48 Printing a  
Memory-locked Message) or when  
you turn on one of the following func-  
tions, it receives faxes with Memory  
Reception.  
Receiver (your machine)  
Sender  
Two In One  
See p.121 Two In One.  
Image Rotation  
GFCYOJ0N  
Rotate Sort  
See p.122 Rotate Sort.  
Multi-copy Reception  
-Display during reception  
The sender's Own Name or Own Fax  
Number appears on the first line.  
Forwarding  
See p.223 Forwarding.  
TX/RX File Save  
See p.236 TX/RX File Save Set-  
tings.  
Reference  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Head-  
er/Own Fax Number, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
the conditions for Substitute Recep-  
tion occurs, incoming faxes are not  
printed but stored in memory. See  
p.111 Substitute Reception.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Reception Features  
Memory Reception  
The machine waits until all pages of  
the message have been received into  
memory before printing the message.  
Receiver (your machine)  
Sender  
4
GFMEMJ0N  
Important  
If the power switch is turned off  
for 12 hours or longer, documents  
saved in memory are deleted.  
If this function is turned on, you  
may not be able to receive very  
large or detailed faxes. If this hap-  
pens, we recommend that you turn  
this function off.  
Limitation  
The machine may not be able to re-  
ceive fax messages when available  
memory space becomes less than  
3%. However, this limitation does  
not apply when the Optional 40MB  
Memory Card is installed.  
Note  
If free memory space reaches 0%  
during Memory Reception, the  
machine can no longer receive the  
current fax message and stops  
communicating.  
When the Image Rotation function  
is turned on, the machine receives  
faxes with Memory Reception.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General  
Substitute Reception  
If any of the conditions listed below are met, the machine automatically switches  
to Memory Reception mode and stores messages in memory instead of printing  
them. This reception mode, in which a received fax message is stored in memory  
and not printed, is called Substitute Reception. Messages received using Substi-  
tute Reception are automatically printed when the problem which caused the  
machine to use Substitute Reception is rectified.  
The table below lists some problems that could have caused Substitute Recep-  
tion to take place and their solutions.  
Why Substitute Reception  
Occurred  
Indication/Status  
Solution  
Paper has run out.  
B is lit red.  
Add paper. See p.103 Load-  
ing Paper in the Main Paper  
Tray, <Basic Features>.  
4
Toner has run out.  
D is lit red.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
See p.113 Replacing the Ton-  
er Cartridge, <Basic Fea-  
tures>.  
Paper is jammed.  
Cover is open.  
"Open cover marked by Remove the jammed paper.  
the arrow and remove  
the document." is dis-  
played.  
See p.110 Clearing Paper  
Jams, <Basic Features>.  
"Cover open. Please  
shut the cover  
A cover other than the Auto  
Document Feeder (ADF) or  
marked with the ar- front cover is open. See p.18  
row." is displayed.  
Guide to Components, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
The machine is in Energy Sav- "Energy Saver Mode" indica- Press the {Clear Modes/Energy  
er Mode. tor and "Receive File" are lit. Saver} key.  
Machine is busy printing with Another function, such as the The message will be printed  
another function.  
optional printer function, is  
currently printing.  
after the current job finishes  
automatically.  
Note  
You can switch this function on or off with User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters(switch 05 bit 0).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reception Features  
Screening Out Messages From Anonymous Senders  
To help you screen out unwanted messages that may fill up your memory, the  
machine can be programmed to only use Substitute Reception for messages that  
arrive with Own Name/Own Fax Number identification.  
Two settings are available:  
"When a name or fax number is received"  
"Free"  
Important  
If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the  
machine may reject an important fax message. We recommend that you ask  
important senders to register an Own Name or Own Fax Number in advance.  
4
Note  
If "When a name or fax number is received" is selected, the machine only  
stores messages when the name or fax number is present. You can change this  
with User Parameters. See p.178 User Parameters(switch 05 bit 1).  
Reference  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Header/Own Fax Number, <Basic Features>  
When a Name or Fax Number is received  
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has pro-  
grammed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power switch is  
turned off for 12 hours or longer, all the messages received are deleted. In  
such a case, the Power Failure Report or the Journal can be used to identify  
which messages are lost so you can ask the senders to transmit them again.  
You can also use this function to screen out unwanted messages, thus con-  
serving memory.  
Free  
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not  
the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Reception Mode  
Selecting the Reception Mode  
There are two ways you can set up  
your machine to handle incoming  
calls:  
Receiving a fax in Telephone Mode  
A When the machine rings, pick up  
Fax mode (Auto Receive Mode)  
the handset.  
Tel mode (optional handset or ex-  
ternal telephone required)  
B If you hear beeps, press the {Start}  
key.  
Reference  
p.53 Reception Modes, <Basic  
Note  
Features>  
Remove any originals from the  
machine before pressing the  
{Start} key.  
4
Fax Mode (Auto Receive  
Mode)  
C Replace the handset. The ma-  
chine will start receiving.  
When a telephone call comes in, the  
machine receives it automatically as a  
fax message. Use this setting for a  
dedicated fax line.  
Telephone Mode  
When a call comes in, you have to  
pick up the optional handset or exter-  
nal telephone and decide whether the  
call is a fax message yourself. If you  
hear a voice, continue your conversa-  
tion as you would using a normal  
telephone. If you hear high pitched  
beeps, instruct the machine to receive  
the fax by following the procedure  
below.  
Use this setting if you wish to share  
the line between the fax machine and  
a telephone.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Reception Features  
Reception Functions  
Preparation  
Transfer Station  
Store the end receiver fax numbers  
beforehand in the Transfer Sta-  
tion's Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials  
or Groups. See p.63 Quick Dial,  
<Basic Features>, p.76 Speed Di-  
al, <Basic Features> and p.87  
Groups, <Basic Features>.  
Transfer Stations allow you to expand  
the standard features of your fax ma-  
chine to set up complex networks.  
The diagram below may make the  
concept clearer.  
End Receiver  
You need to program the Request-  
ing Party's fax number in either a  
Quick Dial key or Speed Dial of the  
Transfer Station's machine (this  
machine) beforehand.  
Transfer Station  
Requesting party  
End Receiver  
4
End Receiver  
Transfer Result Report  
Polling IDs of the Requesting Party  
and Transfer Station must be iden-  
tical for this feature to work. See  
p.199 Registering ID Codes.  
GFCYUK0N  
The following terminology is used in  
this section:  
The return address must be regis-  
tered with Transfer Station(s) be-  
forehand. See p.202 Transfer  
Report.  
Requesting Party  
The machine where the message  
originates from, i.e. the machine  
making a Transfer Request.  
When programming the Request-  
ing Party's fax number in Speed  
Dial, only the numbers "000" to  
"099" are available even though  
Optional Function Upgrade Unit is  
installed.  
Transfer Station  
The machine that forwards the in-  
coming message to another desti-  
nation, i.e. the machine that  
receives the Transfer Request. In  
this section this refers to your ma-  
chine.  
Note  
This machine will not receive a  
Transfer Request unless it has  
enough free memory to store two  
or more destinations dialed from  
the number keys. See p.46 Enter-  
ing Numbers Directly, <Basic  
Features>.  
End Receiver  
The final destination of the mes-  
sage, i.e. the machine that the  
Transfer Station sends to. End Re-  
ceivers must be programmed into  
Quick Dial keys, Speed Dials or  
Groups in the Transfer Station  
(this machine).  
If one of the specified end receivers  
is not registered in the Transfer  
Station, the transfer is halted.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Reception Functions  
If the Requesting Party specifies a  
Group for the End Receivers and  
the total number of End Receivers  
exceeds 250, the Transfer Station  
cannot transfer the message and  
the Requesting Party.  
-Sending the Transfer Result  
Report  
This machine compares the fax num-  
ber of the Requesting Party with the  
Requesting Party's number pro-  
grammed in a Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial, and if the last five digits  
of the two numbers match, it sends  
the Transfer Result report to the Re-  
questing Party.  
Reference  
p.28 Transfer Request”  
Transfer Result Report  
Requesting Party's own dial num-  
This reports whether transmission to  
the End Receivers was successful or  
not.  
ber:  
4
001813-11112222  
Transfer Station's Quick Dial:  
03-11112222  
When the Transfer Station has trans-  
ferred the message to all End Receiv-  
ers, it sends the Transfer Result  
Report back to the Requesting Party.  
The machine prints the report if it  
cannot be sent back to the Requesting  
Party.  
Multi-step Transfer  
The principles of Transfer Stations  
can be used to build up a multi-step  
facsimile network where messages  
are passed through several Transfer  
Stations. By programming the End  
Receivers in a Transfer Station Group,  
you can enable this machine to trans-  
fer messages onto other Transfer Sta-  
tions.  
Preparation  
You must program the fax number  
of the requesting party in a Quick  
Dial key or Speed Dial in the  
Transfer Station. Also, the return  
address of the machine needs to be  
registered beforehand. See p.202  
Transfer Report.  
Note  
You can set whether a portion of  
the document image is printed on  
this report with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 04 bit 7).  
Reference  
p.136 Multi-step Transfer Group  
Settings”  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reception Features  
A Set the original and select any  
Remote Transfer  
scan settings you require.  
This feature allows same make or oth-  
er make fax machines without the  
Transfer Request function to perform  
transfer requests to this machine.  
B Dial using On Hook Dial, or lift  
the handset and dial.  
C When the connected line is a dial  
line, the machine switches over so  
it can send a push signal.  
Preparation  
In order for this machine to per-  
form this function, you need to  
register the Remote ID, and the  
Transfer Result Report return ad-  
dress in the Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial. See p.199 Registering  
ID Codes, p.63 Quick Dial,  
<Basic Features> and p.76 Speed  
Dial, <Basic Features>.  
D When you hear the reception  
tone, press the {q} key.  
When the remote transfer is ac-  
cepted, you will hear a confirma-  
tion "peeee" tone.  
4
Note  
If remote transfer is turned off  
on the machine at the other end,  
you will not hear a confirmation  
tone and the tone mentioned in  
step D will continue.  
Limitation  
The requesting party's fax machine  
must be able to send out a push  
signal.  
If the Transfer Request is not ac-  
cepted, for example if memory  
is full or the Remote ID has been  
wrongly entered 5 times, you  
will hear five "pee-po" tones  
and the line will be cut off.  
The Remote Transfer function only  
works with the standard and op-  
tional G3 line. The optional ISDN  
Unit and NIC FAX Unit (Option  
for Type1) are not supported.  
Note  
E Enter the 4-digit Remote ID  
stored in the Transfer Station,  
then press the {q} key.  
You can select whether the ma-  
chine accepts remote transfers or  
not with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
11 bit 0).  
When you enter the correct ID, you  
will hear a "peeee" tone.  
Note  
If you do not carry out steps E to  
J within 30 seconds, the line  
will be cut off.  
How to make a Remote Transfer Request  
(push signal)  
This procedure describes how to  
make a Transfer Request to this ma-  
chine from the requesting party's ma-  
chine.  
Enter the next tone within 5 sec-  
onds. If you wait too long, you  
will hear a "pee pee pee" tone  
and you must start the whole  
procedure again.  
Note  
To cancel the operation in  
progress, press the {q} key twice.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reception Functions  
If you enter the wrong Remote  
ID 5 times, the line will be auto-  
matically cut off, and if you do  
not change this machine's Re-  
mote ID, remote transfer will  
not be accepted. The figure of 5  
carries over from previous non-  
valid attempts.  
When the optional Function  
Upgrade Unit is installed, en-  
ter a Speed Dial code in the  
range 000 to 999.  
H Specify the end receiver then  
press the {q} key.  
If the end receiver is correct, you  
will hear a "peeee" tone.  
If you enter the wrong ID, you  
will hear a "pee pee pee" tone. If  
this happens, try again.  
Specifying the End Receiver with  
a Quick Dial Key  
F Press {2} {4} {q}.  
A Enter the number (001-144) of  
G Press the {p} key 3 times. Speci-  
fy the Transfer Result Report re-  
turn address stored in the  
Transfer Station using the proce-  
dure below, then press the {q}  
key.  
the Quick Dial key.  
4
Specifying the End Receiver with  
a Speed Dial  
A Press the {p} key, then enter  
If the return address is correct, you  
will hear a "peeee" tone.  
the Speed Dial code (00-99).  
Note  
When the Return Address is  
Stored in a Quick Dial Key  
When the optional Function  
Upgrade Unit is installed, en-  
ter a Speed Dial code in the  
range 000 to 999.  
A Enter the number (001-144) of  
the Quick Dial key.  
Specifying the End Receiver with  
a Group  
When the Return Address is  
Stored in a Speed Dial  
A Press the {p} key twice, then  
enter the Group number (01-  
09).  
A Press the {p} key, then enter  
the Speed Dial code (00-99).  
Note  
Note  
If you hear a "pee pee pee"  
tone, press the {p} key 3  
times and enter the return  
address again.  
Specify an end receiver that  
has been stored in a Quick  
Dial key, Speed Dial or  
Group.  
If you keep getting the error  
tone, the return address may  
not be registered in the Quick  
Dial key or Speed Dial you  
are specifying.  
If you hear a "pee pee pee  
pee" tone, specify the end re-  
ceiver again.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                    
Reception Features  
If you keep on getting the er-  
ror tone, the end receiver  
may not be registered in the  
Quick Dial key or Speed Dial  
you are specifying.  
Remote Transfer with UUI  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
When the optional Function  
Upgrade Unit is installed, en-  
ter a Group number in the  
range 01 to 30.  
It allows G4 faxes with the UUI fea-  
ture to make Transfer Requests to this  
machine using UUI instead of a push  
signal with the same code. See p.83  
UUI.  
I Repeat step H for all end receiv-  
ers.  
You need to store the Tone (UUI)  
function in a User Function key be-  
forehand. See p.154 User Func-  
tion Keys.  
Note  
If you specify 30 end receivers,  
the Transfer Request is accepted  
and you will hear a "pee pee pee  
pee" tone. In this case, proceed  
to step K.  
4
Note  
You can specify up to 30 end re-  
J Press the {q} key twice.  
You can select whether or not the  
machine accepts remote transfers  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 11 bit  
0).  
The Transfer Request is accepted  
and you will hear a "pee pee pee  
pee" tone.  
K When you hear the reception tone  
again, press the {Start} key.  
Your document will be sent.  
How to make a Remote Transfer Request  
(UUI)  
This procedure describes how to  
make a Transfer Request to this ma-  
chine from the requesting party's ma-  
chine.  
A Set the original and select any  
scan settings you require.  
B Select G4 then enter the fax num-  
ber of the Transfer Station.  
C Specify the UUI.  
Note  
On machines of this type, press  
the {User Function} key assigned  
to Tone (UUI) then enter the  
UUI.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reception Functions  
D Press the {Start} key.  
-Remote Transfer Example  
Input  
Destination (Transfer Station) tele-  
phone number = 061234567  
Remote ID = 7777  
Transfer Request Result Report re-  
turn address = Speed Dial 01  
End Receivers = Quick Dial 002,  
Speed Dial 03, Group 04  
061234567{q} 7777 {q} 24  
{q} {p} {p} {p} {p} 01  
{q} 002 {q} {p} 03 {q} {p}  
{p} 04 {q} {q} {q}  
4
(entering the underlined parts as  
the UUI)  
ID Reception  
If you wish to limit reception of mes-  
sages to those from machines of the  
same make and with the same Polling  
Reference  
p.199 Registering ID Codes”  
p.94 ID Transmission”  
JBIG Reception  
Use this feature to receive messages  
level Image Experts Group).  
Reference  
p.102 JBIG Transmission”  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reception Features  
Printing Functions  
Center Mark  
Checkered Mark  
When this function is turned on,  
marks are printed halfway down the  
left side and at the top center of each  
page received. This makes it easy for  
you to position the hole puncher cor-  
rectly when you file received messag-  
es.  
When this function is turned on, a  
checkered mark is printed on the first  
page of fax messages to help you sep-  
arate them.  
4
Note  
You can turn this feature on or off.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 02 bit 4).  
Note  
You can turn this feature on or off.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 02 bit 1).  
Multi-copy Reception  
If the size of the image or docu-  
ment is smaller than the upper half  
of the paper, the left side center  
mark is not printed.  
If you switch this feature on, multiple  
copies of each incoming fax message  
will be printed. You can also choose  
to have multiple copies made of mes-  
sages from particular senders.  
The center mark may deviate a lit-  
tle from the exact center of the  
edge.  
The center mark is not printed  
when you use the machine for  
making copies.  
GFPBUS0N  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Printing Functions  
Note  
Two In One  
Only one set of prints is made  
when using the following features:  
When two messages of the same size  
and direction are received consecu-  
tively, they are printed on a single  
sheet when you turn this feature on.  
This can help you economize on pa-  
per.  
Confidential Reception  
Memory Lock Reception  
Polling Reception  
You cannot cancel the job in  
progress by pressing the {Stop}  
key.  
Two A5 K messages are printed  
side by side on a sheet of A4 L.  
The maximum number of copies  
that can be made of each message  
is 9. If you are using Multi-copy  
with Specified Senders, the maxi-  
Two 81/2 × 11 " K messages are  
printed side by side on a sheet of  
11 × 17" L  
4
You can switch it on and set the  
number of copies with the Multi-  
copy Reception. See p.214 Multi-  
copy Reception.  
Note that the machine will use  
Memory Reception for Multi-copy.  
GFSYUI0N  
Reception Time  
Note  
You can have the date and time when  
a message was received printed at the  
bottom of the received image.  
This feature does not work with  
messages larger than A4 K, or  
81/2"×11"K. When 81/2"×11" K  
size paper is loaded in the ma-  
chine, each page of the received  
message is output onto a single  
sheet.  
Note  
When a received message is print-  
ed on two or more sheets, the date  
and time is printed on the last  
page.  
This feature is not available with  
Polling Reception or when copy-  
The date and time of the output is  
also printed on the message re-  
ceived with Memory Reception.  
If the sent pages are of different  
width, or were sent with different  
scan settings, this feature is not  
available.  
You can turn this feature on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 02 bit  
2).  
If paper matching the size and di-  
rection of a received document is  
not available, Two In One is not  
possible.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Reception Features  
This feature is not available when  
the Image Rotation function is  
tion.  
This feature uses Memory Recep-  
tion.  
Rotate Sort  
You can turn this feature on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 10 bit  
1).  
When both 81 /2 "×11"K and  
81/2"×11"L copy paper is loaded, A4  
size incoming faxes are delivered al-  
ternating by message between K and  
L directions.  
This feature uses Memory Recep-  
tion.  
Note  
Image Rotation  
Rotate Sort is available with the  
following functions:  
If you have installed paper in the tray  
sideways K, incoming fax messages  
will be rotated automatically to fit on  
the paper.  
4
Memory Reception  
Substitute Reception  
Confidential Reception  
Memory Lock Reception  
Lists and Reports  
your machine  
This feature is not available with  
Polling Reception.  
If the Specified Tray function is  
turned on, output may not alter-  
nate between K and L.  
Two In One output is not available.  
GFKAIR0N  
If the incoming message is wider  
than 81/2" and neither 81/2"×11"K  
or 81/2"×11"L paper is loaded, this  
feature is not available.  
Note  
Polling Reception.  
When 11"×17" paper is loaded, if  
you receive long documents of  
81/2" width, they are printed on  
11"×17" size paper.  
You can turn this feature on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
2).  
Documents may not be printed  
with A4 K after the machine exit-  
ed from Energy Saver Standby  
Two In One setting is disregarded  
when this function is turned on.  
See p.121 Two In One.  
The document may be slightly re-  
tally when printed out.  
In order to use this function, Image  
Rotation needs to be switched on  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 10 bit  
2).  
You can choose to have received  
messages printed from a specified  
tray. See p.220 Specified Tray.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Printing Functions  
You can turn this function on or off  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 10 bit  
4).  
Guideline for split (when mes-  
sage is 90mm or 3.6 in. longer  
than paper)  
You can adjust the overprinting  
length and length of reduction  
within the following ranges:  
Page Separation and Length  
Reduction  
Guideline for split:0 - 155mm (0  
- 6.1 in.)  
When the size of a received message  
is longer than the paper loaded in the  
machine, each page of the message  
can be split and printed on several  
sheets, or reduced and printed on a  
single sheet. For example, when  
81/2"×11"L paper is loaded, this fea-  
ture splits the received message if the  
excess length is about 90mm (3.6 in.)  
or more, and reduces it if the excess  
length is within about 90mm (3.6 in.).  
When a message is split, the split  
mark (p) is inserted at the split posi-  
tion and about 10mm (0.4 in.) of the  
split area is duplicated on the top of  
the second sheet.  
TSI Print  
Usually the sender's Fax Header is  
printed on received messages. If the  
sender has not programmed their Fax  
Header, you will not be able to identi-  
fy them. However, if you turn this  
feature on, the sender's Own Name or  
Own Fax Number programmed by  
the sender is printed instead so you  
can find out where the message came  
from.  
4
TSI = Transmitting Subscriber  
Identification  
Note  
You can turn this function on or  
off with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
02 bit 3).  
ABC  
BC  
AB  
(Document)  
CIL Print  
GFBUNK0N  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
Note  
If turned on, this information is print-  
ed on every page.  
Your service representative can  
customize this feature with the fol-  
lowing settings. Bracketed values  
are defaults.  
The CIL (Call Identification Line) re-  
fers to the combination of the receiv-  
er's own fax number, name, the  
sender's own fax number and name,  
time, and page number.  
Reduction (on)  
Print split mark (on)  
Overprinting (on)  
Overprinting length (10mm or  
0.4 in.)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Reception Features  
Note  
Note  
You can turn CIL on and off with  
User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters(switch 02 bit 5).  
When the machine is shipped, the  
default setting is Normal. You can  
change this with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 12 bits 4,3).  
TID Print  
Toner saving  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
Use this feature to save on over 50%  
of the toner used for printing incom-  
ing faxes, reports and lists.  
If turned on, this information is print-  
ed on every page.  
The TID (Transmitter ID) refers to the  
name registered by the sender in their  
fax header.  
Limitation  
4
This feature does not apply to cop-  
ies, or prints made with the printer  
option. However, the optional  
Printer Interface has its own toner  
saving function.  
Note  
You can turn TID on and off with  
User Parameters. See p.178 User  
Parameters(switch 02 bit 6).  
Note  
If this feature is turned on, it inval-  
idates the Output Density feature  
and image density is fixed at Nor-  
mal.  
Reference  
p.55 Own Name/Fax Head-  
er/Own Fax Number, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
When receiving faxes sent using  
Photo (Halftone) mode from this  
maker's machines, turn Toner Sav-  
ing off.  
Adjusting the Printing Density  
You can economize on toner by ad-  
justing the image density used when  
generating all printed output (Output  
Density), or just for incoming faxes,  
reports and lists (Toner Saving).  
When Toner Saving is turned on,  
er than usual. To check on the im-  
age quality, print out the User  
Parameter List. See p.189 Printing  
the User Parameter List.  
Output density  
If the other party sends you a fax  
using the Photo (Halftone) mode,  
from the document image.  
This setting specifies the image densi-  
ty used for printing incoming faxes,  
reports, lists and copies.  
You can turn Toner Saving on or  
off with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch  
12 bit 2).  
Three levels are available: Dark, Nor-  
mal, and Light.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size  
When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size  
If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message,  
the machine chooses a paper size based upon the paper you have available. For  
example, if your machine has A4 L and 81/2"×11" L loaded and you receive a  
A5 K size message, check the A5 K column of the table below. The paper size  
at the top has the highest priority. In this case, since 81/2"×11" L is a higher pri-  
ority than A4 L, the message is printed on 81/2"×11" L.  
Priority Table  
Reception Size  
81/2" 81/4"  
81/2" 81/2"  
11"× A3L B4L  
17"  
L
A4L  
A4K B5K A5K  
×14" ×13"  
×11" ×11"  
4
L
L,  
L
K
8"×1  
3"L  
81/2" 81/4"  
81/2" 81/2"  
Priori-  
ty  
1
2
11"×1 A3L B4L  
A4L  
A4K B4L A5K  
7"L  
×14" ×13"  
×11" ×11"  
L
L,  
L
K
8"×13  
"L  
81/4"  
×13"  
L,  
81/2" 81/2"  
×11" ×11"  
K *1 L *1  
81/2"  
×11"  
L
A3L 11"×1 A3L  
A4L A4K  
A4L A4K  
*2  
*2  
*1  
*1  
7"L  
8"×13  
"L *2  
81/2" 81/2"  
81/2"  
×11"  
L *2  
81/2"  
×11"  
K
81/2"  
×11"  
K *1  
3
4
11"×1 A4L A4K  
A4L A4K  
A4L  
*2  
*1, 2  
*1  
7"L  
×11" ×11"  
M
M
81/2" 81/2" 81/2"  
×11" ×11" ×11"  
81/2" 81/2"  
×11" ×11"  
81/2" 81/2"  
A4K  
*1, 2  
A4K A4L  
A4L  
*1  
*1  
×11" ×11"  
L *2 K *1,  
L *1  
K
LL LL  
*1  
M
*1  
2
81/2" 81/2" 81/2" 81/4" 81/4"  
81/2"  
×11"  
L *1  
5
6
A4  
M
A4  
M
A3L A3L  
A4K  
*1  
×11" ×11" ×11" ×13" ×13"  
L *2 K *1,  
LL  
*1  
L,  
8"×13 8"×13  
"L "L  
L,  
2
81/2"  
81/2" 81/2"  
81/4"  
×13"  
L,  
8"×13  
"L  
A4L A4L A4  
L *1 L *1  
A3L  
*1, 2  
11"×1 11"×1 A3L  
7"L 7"L  
M
×11"  
×14" ×14"  
K *1,  
L
L
2
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reception Features  
Reception Size  
81/2" 81/4"  
81/2" 81/2"  
11"× A3L B4L  
17"  
L
A4L  
A4K B5K A5K  
×14" ×13"  
×11" ×11"  
L
L,  
L
K
8"×1  
3"L  
81/2"  
×14"  
L
Priori-  
ty  
7
8
9
A4L A3L 11"×1 A3L 11"×1  
11"×1  
7"L  
*1, 2  
*1  
L *1  
7"L  
7"L  
*1, 2  
*1, 2  
81/2"  
×14"  
L
11"×1  
11"×1 A3L  
11"×1  
*1  
7"L  
7"L  
7"L  
*1, 2  
*1, 2  
*1  
81/2"  
×11"  
K *2  
B4L B4L B4L  
A3L  
*1  
4
10  
11  
A3L A3L A3L B4L  
A4K  
81/2"  
×11"  
K
11"×1 11"×1 11"×1 A3L  
7"L 7"L 7"L  
12  
13  
A5  
M
A5  
M
A5  
M
11"×1  
B4L  
7"L  
81/2" 81/2" 81/2"  
×11" ×11" ×11"  
M
A5  
M
A3L  
M
M
14  
A4  
M
A4  
M
A4  
M
A4  
M
11"×1  
7"L  
*1 The printed image is rotated by the Image Rotation function.  
*2 The printed image is reduced in size.  
Important  
The width of document that fax machines can receive is that of 81/2"×11",  
81/2"×14", 11"×17", A4, B4 or A3 size. Any document whose width is less than  
81/2"×11" or A4 width is sent as 81/2"×11" or A4 with the length unchanged.  
Note  
The paper size used to print a received message may be different from the size  
of the sent original.  
Reference  
p.123 Page Separation and Length Reduction”  
p.122 Image Rotation”  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Copying  
Copying  
This section describes how to make  
copies.  
In order to use copy paper that you  
or optional Paper Tray Unit(s), you  
need to install the optional Bypass  
Tray Unit. See p.129 Making Cop-  
ies on Special Paper.  
Important  
When making multiple copy sets,  
copying starts once all originals  
have been scanned into memory. If  
memory runs out (free memory  
reaches 0%) while scanning in, the  
copy job is canceled and the  
scanned data is deleted from mem-  
ory. However, copying the  
scanned original is possible if you  
select Stack as the output order for  
multiple copying.  
multiple sets of copies to Sort  
(1,2,3,1,2,3) or Stack (1,1,2,2,3,3)  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 09 bit  
7).  
If you wish to prevent passersby  
from freely making copies, you can  
disable the copy feature with User  
Parameters. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 12 bit 7).  
Note  
Recommended originals are the  
same as recommended documents  
for fax transmission. Set the origi-  
nal and select any scan settings in  
the same way as for fax transmis-  
sion.  
There may be slight difference in  
the size and quality of printed im-  
age between fax transmission and  
copy feature.  
The margins of error when copy-  
ing at 100% magnification are as  
You cannot set the Resolution to  
Super Fine in Copy mode. Howev-  
Optional 40MB Memory Card and  
enabling Super Fine resolution in  
Copy mode with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 20 bit 1).  
Horizontal: +2.0%, 2.5%  
Vertical: +1.5%, 2.0%  
The copying feature is available  
only in standby mode. If the ma-  
chine is in another operation  
mode, make it return to standby  
mode. See p.25 Standby Display,  
<Basic Features>.  
When turning the "EXTRA SUPER  
FINE IN TRANSMISSION MODE"  
on with User Parameters (switch  
20 bit 1), the machine may not be  
able to send or receive fax messag-  
es using multiple lines, or copy or  
print received messages.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Copying  
A Press the {Copy} key.  
D Press 0 or 1 key to select the  
copy paper size.  
Note  
The Resolution automatically  
changes to Super Fine.  
You cannot select the paper size  
if the optional Paper Tray  
Unit(s) or optional Bypass Tray  
Unit is not installed.  
Note  
If you press the {Copy} key  
again, the machine returns to  
standby mode.  
If you choose copy paper small-  
er than the originals in width,  
copied images will be reduced  
in size.  
5
B Set the original.  
Note  
If your original is larger in  
length than the copy paper you  
select, the excess part of the  
original image will not be cop-  
ied.  
If the optional Paper Tray  
Unit(s) is installed, the machine  
searches the paper sources for  
copy paper that has the same  
width as your original in the fol-  
lowing order, and selects the  
paper source: main paper tray,  
optional Paper Tray Unit(s), op-  
can also select which paper  
source to be searched first with  
User Parameters. See p.178 Us-  
er Parameters(switch 19 bits  
7,6,5).  
E If you are making multiple cop-  
ies, enter the number of copies  
with the number keys.  
C Select any scan settings as neces-  
sary.  
Note  
You can specify between 1 and  
99 copies.  
If you incorrectly enter the  
number, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
Note  
F Press the {Start} key to start copy-  
ing.  
You can load paper in the Bypass  
Tray Unit up to approximately 100  
sheets (81/2"×11" or smaller size),  
or 10 sheets (larger than 81/2"×11"  
size). Up to 40 postcards can be  
loaded.  
When copying is complete, stand-  
by display reappears.  
Note  
To stop copying while it is in  
progress, press the {Stop} key.  
Then open the ADF cover and  
ADF unit and remove any orig-  
inals that are left inside.  
Load OHP transparencies one  
sheet at a time, and remove them  
from the paper tray immediately  
after copying is complete.  
When making copies on OHP  
transparencies, an unusual sound  
may be emitted depending on the  
type of OHP transparency. To  
avoid this, place a sheet of quality  
paper on top of the OHP transpar-  
ency when loading.  
Reference  
p.108 Clearing Original Jams,  
<Basic Features>  
Making Copies on Special  
Paper  
5
Load postcards in the landscape  
orientation (L).  
You can make copies on special paper  
that cannot be loaded in the main pa-  
per tray or optional Paper Tray Unit  
by using the optional Bypass Tray  
Unit.  
Postcards that are curled in the  
center may cause a paper jam. Be  
sure to flatten them before loading.  
A Press the {Copy} key.  
Set the copy paper with the printable  
side facing down.  
You can use the following types of  
special paper:  
Paper that weighs between 60 and  
90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)  
OHP transparencies  
Adhesive labels  
Postcards  
Important  
B Set the original, and select any  
If the paper is curled, flatten it be-  
fore loading in order to avoid pa-  
per jams.  
scan settings as necessary.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Copying  
You can enter the paper size  
C Press 0 or 1 key to select the pa-  
per size of the optional Bypass  
Tray Unit.  
in the following range:  
Width: 100 to 297 mm (3.9  
to 11.6 in.)  
Length: 148 to 432 mm (5.8  
to 17.0 in.)  
C Press [OK].  
Specifying the Paper Type  
A Press [Pap.Type].  
B Press 0 or 1 key to select the  
Note  
desired paper type.  
You can enter the paper size by  
pressing [Custom]. However,  
this is possible only when [Cus-  
tom] is displayed as the paper  
size of the optional Bypass Tray  
Unit (the size mark is located at  
the "p" mark).  
5
You can specify the paper thick-  
ness by pressing [Pap.Type].  
Note  
Specifying the Paper Size  
Select [Thick] when making  
copies on postcards.  
A Press [Custom].  
C Press [OK].  
B Press 0 or 1 key to select [Hor-  
izontal] or Vertical, and enter  
the value of the paper size.  
D If you are making multiple cop-  
ies, enter the number of copies  
with the number keys.  
Note  
Press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key before entering  
the value.  
E Press the {Start} key to start copy-  
ing.  
When copying is complete, the ma-  
chine returns to standby mode.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Facsimile User Tools  
Accessing the User Tools  
You can utilize fax features in full by accessing the User Tools and storing fax  
numbers of destinations or registering often used functions. You can also enable  
various functions such as Printing Reports/Lists, User Function Keys or Fax On  
Demand.  
You can make settings for the functions described in the table below.  
The following options are necessary for using functions with the corresponding  
number:  
*1 NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1)  
*2 Optional Fax On Demand Unit  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
Program/  
Delete  
Menu  
Registering/Editing Allows you to program a fax number p.63 Quick Di-  
and Deleting Quick  
Dials  
into a Quick Dial key so that you may al, <Basic Fea-  
specify the destination simply by  
pressing the key.  
tures>  
Registering/Editing Allows you to program multiple fax  
and Deleting Groups numbers as a group so that you may  
easily specify multiple fax numbers as  
p.87 Groups,  
<Basic Features>  
destinations.  
Registering/Editing Allows you to program a fax number p.76 Speed Di-  
and Deleting Speed  
Dials  
as a Speed Dial destination so that you al, <Basic Fea-  
may specify the fax number as a desti- tures>  
nation simply by pressing the {Speed  
Dial} key and then the two-digit or  
three-digit (when the optional Func-  
tion Upgrade Unit is installed) Speed  
Dial number.  
Storing/Editing and Allows you to program a fax number p.139 Storing  
Deleting Keystroke  
Programs  
or a series of key operations that you  
regularly use into a Quick Dial key.  
and Changing  
grams”  
Registering/Editing Allows you to store a document that  
p.145 Register-  
and Deleting Auto  
Documents  
you often use in memory and send or ing Auto Docu-  
print it when needed by using a Quick ments”  
Dial key.  
Address Template *1 Allows you to program a string of text Chapter 6,  
to the {#} key of Quick Dial. You can "Registering  
call out the text when entering texts  
such as e-mail addresses.  
Texts" in the  
NIC FAX Unit  
manual  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Facsimile User Tools  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
Reports/  
Lists  
Journal  
Allows you to print the Journal manu- p.50 Printing  
ally. You can check information about the Journal”  
the recent 50 communications (recep-  
tions + transmissions).  
Quick Dial  
Allows you to print the fax numbers  
p.73 Quick  
List/Quick Key Label programed into Quick Dial keys to  
Dial Key Label  
check the contents. You can also print (Dial Label),  
labels for Quick Dial keys. <Basic Features>  
Group Dial List  
Speed Dial List  
Allows you to print and check destina- Re-  
tions registered in Groups.  
ports/Lists”  
Allows you to print and check destina- p.149 Re-  
tions programmed in Speed Dial.  
ports/Lists”  
Keystroke Program  
List  
Allows you to print and check contents p.149 Re-  
of Keystroke Programs.  
ports/Lists”  
Auto Document  
Allows you to print and check docu-  
ments stored in Auto Document.  
p.149 Re-  
ports/Lists”  
Setup  
Monitor Volume  
Allows you to adjust the volume of  
sounds emitted from the machine's in- ing Volume,  
p.104 Adjust-  
ternal speaker such as monitoring  
sounds, the buzzer, or key sound.  
6
Adjusting the  
Allows you to adjust the contrast of the p.151 Adjust-  
Display Contrast  
control panel display.  
ing the Display  
Contrast”  
Date/Time  
Allows you to set the machine's inter- p.151  
nal clock to the current time, which is Date/Time”  
used for features such as Send Later.  
Summer Time/DST  
Registering Own  
Allows you to advance the machine's p.151  
internal clock or set the clock back to  
observe the Summer Time.  
Date/Time”  
Allows you to register information dis- p.55 Own  
Name and Fax Head- played on the other party's machine or Name/Fax  
er  
printed on the header of every fax you Header/Own  
send. You can register one Own Name Fax Number,  
(Receive Terminal Identification) and <Basic Features>  
two Fax Headers (TTI).  
Adjusting the  
Allows you to adjust the color balance Chapter 5,  
for scanning color originals using the "Scanner RGB"  
Scanner RGB *1  
Network Scanner function.  
in the NIC FAX  
Unit manual  
Fax Reset Timer  
On Hook Timer  
Allows you to set the duration of time p.152 Fax Re-  
before the machine automatically re-  
turns to standby mode.  
set Timer”  
Allows you to set the duration of time p.153 On  
before the On Hook status is cleared  
when a fax message is sent using On  
Hook Dial.  
Hook Timer”  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Name  
User Function Keys  
Description  
Reference  
Allows you to program each of the  
p.154 User  
User Function keys ({ F1} to {F10})  
Function Keys”  
with a desired function. You can also  
assign a function that you often use, so  
that multiple key operations may be  
performed by pressing one key.  
Fax On  
Registering and Edit- Allows you to register or edit docu-  
ing Fax On Demand ments offered for the fax information ing/Editing  
p.160 Register-  
Demand *2  
Documents  
service.  
Fax On De-  
mand Docu-  
ments”  
Deleting Fax On De- Allows you to delete documents regis- p.162 Deleting  
mand Documents  
tered for Fax On Demand.  
Fax On De-  
mand Docu-  
ments”  
Printing Fax On De- Allows you to print documents regis- p.164 Printing  
mand Documents  
tered for Fax On Demand.  
Fax On De-  
ments”  
Printing the Fax On  
Demand List  
Allows you to print the list of docu-  
ments registered for Fax On Demand. the Fax On De-  
p.165 Printing  
6
mand List”  
Printing the Fax On  
Allows you to check how many times p.165 Printing  
Demand Access Re- the Fax On Demand documents have the Fax On De-  
port  
been sent successfully/unsuccessfully. mand Access  
Report”  
Fax On Demand Re- Allows you to record the message that p.166 Fax On  
corded Messages  
the other party hears when he or she  
makes a request for the Fax On De-  
mand service.  
Demand Re-  
corded Messag-  
es”  
Note  
The numbers that appear with function names on the display vary depending  
on which options are installed.  
Access the user tools in standby mode. If the machine is in another operation  
mode, return it to standby mode. See p.25 Standby Display, <Basic Fea-  
tures>.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile User Tools  
-About the Display  
You can scroll through items by pressing [Prev.] or [Next].  
You can return to the previous menu by pressing [PrevMenu].  
Items on the display are highlighted when selected.  
Press [OK] when you finish making settings. The settings that you made are  
not stored in the machine if you finish the procedure without pressing [OK]  
when accessing User Tools.  
When you press [OK] or [Cancel], the settings that you made are stored or can-  
celed, and the machine returns to standby mode.  
B Press [Counter].  
Counters  
This function allows you to check the  
total number of transmitted, received,  
scanned, and printed pages on the  
display.  
6
Transmissions:  
Total number of transmitted pages  
Receptions:  
Total number of received pages  
C When you have checked the total  
Scanning:  
pages, press [OK].  
The combined total number of  
pages that have been scanned in  
when copying and sending faxes.  
Printing:  
The combined total number of  
pages that have been printed  
through fax reception, copying,  
and PC printing (option).  
The totals are displayed.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Press [Prev.] or [Next] to switch  
between page 1 and 2. Page 1  
shows the total number of pages  
sent and received, page 2 shows  
the total number of pages scanned  
and printed.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing the User Tools  
D Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Selecting the Display  
Language  
If your native language is Spanish or  
French, you can have the messages  
that appear on displays, lists and re-  
ports shown in either of these lan-  
guages instead of in English. Follow  
the procedure below to change be-  
tween the three languages.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
6
B Press [Language].  
C Press 0 or 1 key to select the lan-  
guage you wish to use.  
D Press [OK].  
The language is changed.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Facsimile User Tools  
Program/Delete Menu  
D Enter the code for "Prog. Group  
Multi-step Transfer Group  
Settings  
Dial" with the number keys.  
This procedure describes how to store  
a Transfer Station in a Group. Once  
set up, this machine can then forward  
incoming transfer requests that speci-  
fy this Group onto the stored Transfer  
Station. The destination stored in the  
Group becomes the receiving station  
(in this case, store 30 or less items in  
the Group). Messages sent via multi-  
ple Transfer Stations further enhance  
the efficiency of the Transfer Request  
feature.  
E Enter the number of the Group  
you wish to register or edit with  
the number keys.  
To Check On Currently  
Registered Groups  
Note  
6
For more details, please contact  
your service representative.  
A Press [Status].  
B Enter the number of the Group  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
you wish to register or edit.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
Note  
with the number keys.  
If a free Group is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [N-  
ext] to search for one.  
If you press [Cancel], the dis-  
play in step E reappears.  
C Enter the code for "Program/De-  
lete" with the number keys.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Program/Delete Menu  
Note  
F Press 0 or 1 key to select "Mul-  
tistep Group".  
If the optional ISDN Unit or  
the optional Extra G3 Inter-  
face Unit is installed, you can  
choose which line to use be-  
fore you enter the fax num-  
ber by pressing the User  
Function key ({F1} to {F10})  
which the line selection func-  
tion is stored in.  
I Press [Recv. Stn].  
G Press [Next].  
H Specify the Transfer Station.  
Note  
You can enter the Transfer Sta-  
tion fax number using a Quick  
Dial key, a Speed Dial or the  
number keys.  
6
J Specify the end receiver in one of  
the following ways.  
If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear} or {Stop} key and try  
again.  
For details about how to specify an  
end receiver, see p.31 Specifying  
an End Receiver.  
Choosing the line (the {Line  
Selection} key)  
Note  
A Press the {Line Selection} Key to  
Specify the end receiver stored  
in the Transfer Station with the  
Quick Dial key, Speed Dial or  
Group.  
select the line.  
The destination specified as the  
end receiver is passed to the  
Transfer Station and sent to the  
number stored in the Transfer  
Station.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile User Tools  
Note  
K Press [Add RcvStn].  
If the name is already stored,  
it will be shown on the dis-  
play. To change it, press  
{Clear} and enter another  
name.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
C Press [OK].  
Note  
If you do not add any end re-  
ceivers, proceed to step M.  
D Press [Exit].  
L Specify the remaining end receiv-  
ers in the same way.  
M Press [Others].  
6
Storing the Group in a Quick Dial  
Key  
A Enter the code for "Assign  
Key" with the number keys.  
Registering/Editing the Group  
Name  
A Enter the code for "Group  
Name" with the number keys.  
B Press the Quick Dial key you  
wish to store the Group in.  
B Enter the Group name.  
Note  
To search for a free Quick  
Dial key, press [Status].  
If you make a mistake, press  
the {Clear} key and try again.  
C Press [OK].  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program/Delete Menu  
D Press [Exit].  
N Press [OK]  
Note  
Storing and Changing  
Keystroke Programs  
If you regularly send messages to a  
particular destination or transmit us-  
ing the same features, you can save a  
lot of repetitive keypad operations by  
storing these settings in a Keystroke  
Program.  
Keystroke Programs can then be re-  
called by just pressing a Quick Dial  
key or Speed Dial. The following pro-  
cedure can be used to program a new  
Keystroke Program or overwrite an  
old one.  
You can register the following items  
in Keystroke Programs:  
Memory Transmission, Immediate  
Transmission, Send Later, Fax  
Header Print, Confidential Trans-  
mission, Transfer Request, Polling  
Transmission, Free Polling Trans-  
mission, Polling Reception, Own  
Name/Own Fax Number, Trans-  
fer Stations, End Receivers, User  
Codes, Confidential IDs, Polling  
IDs, SUB Code Transmission with  
the Mode Key, SEP Code Polling  
Reception, SEP/SUB/PWD/SID  
Codes.  
6
If you press 0 or 1 key, you  
can view and check end receiv-  
ers already stored.  
To delete the displayed end re-  
ceiver, press the {Clear} key.  
To cancel programming this  
Group, press [Cancel]. The dis-  
play in step E will reappear.  
O Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
Program name (up to 20 charac-  
P Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
ters)  
by mode.  
Note  
We recommend that you print the  
Keystroke Program List and keep it  
when you register or change a func-  
tion. See p.149 Reports/Lists.  
You cannot register a program in a  
Quick Dial key or Speed Dial al-  
ready used for another function.  
Keystroke Programs can only be  
stored in Speed Dials when the op-  
tional Function Upgrade Unit is in-  
stalled.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Facsimile User Tools  
The maximum number of pro-  
grams you can register is 144 (244  
when the optional Function Up-  
grade Unit is installed).  
E Press a Quick Dial key or enter  
Speed Dial code you wish to reg-  
ister.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Storing the Program in a Quick  
Dial Key  
A Press the Quick Dial key you  
wish to store or edit the pro-  
gram in.  
B Enter the number of the "Fax Fea-  
tures" with the number keys.  
Note  
To check which programs are  
currently stored, press [Sta-  
tus].  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
You can also select the Quick  
Dial to store the program in  
from the status screen.  
6
C Enter the code for "Program/De-  
lete" using the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Store Pro-  
gram" using the number keys.  
Storing the program in a Speed  
Dial  
A Press [Switch].  
Note  
If "Store Program" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program/Delete Menu  
B Enter the code of the Speed  
Dial you wish to store or edit  
the program in.  
A Storing Example of Keystroke  
Program  
The following example describes  
the procedure for storing a Key-  
stroke Program of sending a fax  
message to a destination whose fax  
number is 0123456789 by using the  
Send Later function:  
Note  
To check which programs are  
currently stored, press [Sta-  
tus].  
A Press  
{0}{1}{2}{3}{4}{5}{6}{7}{8}  
{9}.  
You can also select the Speed  
Dial to store the program in  
from the status screen.  
B Press [Mode].  
C Enter the code for "Send Later"  
using the number keys.  
D Carry out the operations for  
specifying the Send Later func-  
tion.  
Note  
F Press [Feature].  
6
If any program is already  
stored, the contents of the  
program is shown. To edit it,  
press the {Clear Modes/Energy  
Saver} key, and then perform  
Reference  
p.5 Sending at a Specific  
Time (Send Later)”  
G Carry out the operations you wish  
to store in the program.  
H Press [OK].  
Note  
The storing procedure varies  
depending on the contents of  
the program.  
If you press the {Clear Modes/En-  
ergy Saver} key, the whole oper-  
ation is canceled.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile User Tools  
I Press [Name].  
L Press [OK].  
The program is stored.  
Note  
Storing of program names can  
be skipped. If you wish to skip  
it, proceed to step L.  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the Key-  
stroke Program is canceled and  
the display shown in step E ap-  
pears again.  
J Enter the program name.  
M Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
6
Note  
If a program name is already  
registered in the Quick Dial key,  
the name is shown on the dis-  
play. If you wish to change the  
program name, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key  
and enter another name.  
Using a Keystroke Program  
Example: Recalling a program con-  
taining fax number "0123456789" and  
the Send Later function.  
A Set the original.  
Note  
Reference  
If the destination, resolution,  
contrast and/or halftone are not  
registered in the program, carry  
out these operations now.  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
K Press [OK]  
The function name and program  
name are shown on the display.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Program/Delete Menu  
B Select the Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial with the program  
stored in by pressing the Quick  
Dial key, or pressing the Speed  
Dial key and entering the Speed  
Dial code.  
Deleting a Keystroke Program  
Note  
If you delete a program, the regis-  
tered program name is also delet-  
ed.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
6
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Program/De-  
C Press [OK] .  
lete" with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Delete Pro-  
gram" with the number keys.  
Note  
If the step right before pressing  
the {Start} key is also pro-  
grammed, you can press the  
{Start} key to complete the op-  
eration without pressing [OK].  
Note  
If "Delete Program" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
D Press the {Start} key.  
The machine starts scanning the  
document.  
The message will be sent at the  
specified time.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Facsimile User Tools  
E Press a Quick Dial key in which F Press [Yes].  
the program you wish to delete is  
stored.  
The contents of the program are  
shown on the display.  
G Press [Yes].  
Note  
If you wish to delete a Key-  
stroke Program stored in a  
Speed Dial, press [Switch]. Then  
press the {Speed Dial} key and  
enter the Speed Dial code.  
The program is deleted.  
6
Note  
Checking the Keystroke  
Programs Currently Programmed  
If you press [No], the program is  
not deleted and the display  
shown in step E appears again.  
A Press [Status]  
B Press a Quick Dial key or enter  
H Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
a Speed Dial code.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the pro-  
gram is not deleted and the  
display shown in step E ap-  
pears again.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program/Delete Menu  
You can store up to 144 Auto Doc-  
uments. (244 when the optional  
Function Upgrade Unit is in-  
stalled, and the additional 100 out  
to #099.)  
Registering Auto Documents  
If you find that you often have to send  
a particular page to people (for exam-  
ple, a map, a standard attachment, or  
a set of instructions), store that page  
in memory as an Auto Document.  
This saves re-scanning the document  
every time you wish to send it.  
Reference  
p.99 Auto Document”  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Use the following procedure to pro-  
gram a new Auto Document or over-  
write an existing one.  
Important  
If the power switch is off more  
than 12 hours, all Auto Documents  
stored are deleted. In such a case,  
use the Power Failure Report to  
identify which messages have  
been lost.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
using the number keys.  
6
Programming and Changing an Auto  
Document  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
You can store the following items in  
an Auto Document:  
C Enter the code for "Program/De-  
lete" with the number keys.  
Document image  
Scan settings (Resolution, halftone,  
and Image Density)  
Document name (up to 20 charac-  
ters)  
D Enter the code for "Prog. Auto  
Label Insert Size  
Doc." with the number keys.  
Note  
Auto Documents can only be  
stored in Speed Dials when the  
optional Function Upgrade Unit  
is installed.  
Note  
You can only send one Auto Docu-  
If "Prog. Auto Doc." is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
ment per transmission.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Facsimile User Tools  
Note  
E Press a Quick Dial key or a Speed  
Dial that the Auto Document you  
wish to store in.  
Press [Status] to check the  
documents currently stored.  
You can also select the Speed  
Dial to store the Auto Docu-  
ment from the status screen.  
To store an Auto Document in a  
Quick Dial key  
A Press the Quick Dial key that  
you wish to store the Auto  
Document in.  
F What you do next depends on  
whether the Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial has a destination al-  
ready registered. Choose one of  
the following two procedures:  
Note  
Press [Status] to check the  
documents currently stored.  
When the destination is not  
registered  
6
A Press [Name].  
To store an Auto Document in a  
Speed Dial  
A Press [Switch].  
Note  
You can skip entering the  
name of the Auto Document,  
and proceed to step D.  
B Enter the name.  
B Enter the code of the Speed  
Dial you wish to store the Auto  
Document in.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
C Press [OK].  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program/Delete Menu  
D Press [Label].  
J Press [Exit] to return to standby  
mode.  
Deleting an Auto Document  
Note  
You cannot delete an Auto Docu-  
ment waiting to be transmitted.  
Delete it after the transmission, or  
delete the Auto Document after  
deleting the file waiting to be  
transmitted.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select  
"Large(1x2)" or "Normal".  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
When the destination is registered  
A Press [Label].  
6
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
using the number keys.  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Program/De-  
B Press 0 or 1 key to select  
lete" with the number keys.  
"Large(1x2)" or "Normal".  
C Press [OK].  
D Enter the code for "Delete Auto  
Doc." with the number keys.  
G Set the original.  
H Press the {Start} key to scan in the  
original.  
When scanning has finished, the  
Auto Document is stored.  
Note  
I Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
If "Delete Auto Doc." is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Facsimile User Tools  
Note  
E Press a Quick Dial key in which  
the Auto Document you wish to  
delete is stored.  
If you select the Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial in which a fax  
number is stored, the following  
display appears. Even if you  
press [Yes], only the attached  
Auto Document will be deleted  
but not the fax number.  
The stored document is shown on  
the display.  
Note  
If you wish to delete an Auto  
Document stored in a Speed Di-  
al, press [Switch]. Then press the  
{Speed Dial} key and enter the  
Speed Dial code.  
G Press [Yes] to delete the Auto Doc-  
ument.  
6
Checking On Stored Auto  
Documents  
Note  
A Press [Status].  
If you press [No], the Auto Doc-  
ument is not deleted and the  
display shown in step E reap-  
pears.  
B Scroll through the list with  
[Prev.] or [Next].  
H Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the dis-  
play in step E appears.  
F Press [Yes].  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reports/Lists  
Reports/Lists  
following reports and lists manually.  
Select a report or list as needed.  
B Enter the number of the "Fax Fea-  
tures" using the number keys.  
Journal  
See p.50 Printing the Journal.  
Quick Dial list/Quick Key Label  
See p.73 Quick Dial Key Label  
(Dial Label), <Basic Features>.  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
Group Dial List  
See p.87 Groups, <Basic Fea-  
tures>.  
C Enter the code for "Reports/Lists "  
with the number keys.  
Speed Dial List  
tures>.  
See p.139 Storing and Changing  
Keystroke Programs.  
D Enter the code of the report or list  
6
you wish to print.  
Auto Document  
See p.145 Registering Auto Docu-  
ments.  
Note  
If the optional Paper Supply Unit  
is installed, you can set reports and  
lists to be printed from a specific  
However, once this setting is  
made, any fax messages received  
cannot be printed from that paper  
tray. See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 19 bits 2,1,0).  
Note  
If you cannot see the item you  
need, press [Prev.] or [Next].  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press [Cancel] and enter the cor-  
rect number.  
After selecting "Journal", choose  
"All", "File No.", "User Code" or  
"Date".  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
After selecting "Quick Dial List"  
choose "Quick Dial List" or "Dial  
Label".  
After selecting "Speed Dial List"  
choose "Speed Dial Order" or  
"Alphabetic Order".  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Facsimile User Tools  
E Press the {Start} key.  
When printing is completed, the  
display shown in step D appears  
again.  
Note  
If you press the {Stop} key be-  
fore printing starts, the printing  
stops and the display shown in  
step D appears again.  
F Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
6
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup  
Setup  
F Press [OK].  
Adjusting the Display Contrast  
Note  
Follow these steps to adjust the con-  
trast of the control panel display.  
Eight levels of contrast are available.  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
H Press [Exit] to return to standby  
mode.  
Date/Time  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
Use this function to set your ma-  
chine's internal clock to the current  
time and date. This time is shown on  
the display, printed on pages and  
used for various features, such as  
Send Later.  
with the number keys.  
6
If the current date and time are  
wrong, use this procedure to correct  
them.  
C Enter the code for "Setup" with  
the number keys.  
Note  
The machine automatically sets the  
internal clock one hour ahead  
when daylight saving time begins,  
and one hour back when it ends.  
D Enter the code for "Display Con-  
trast" with the number keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to adjust the  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
contrast.  
with the number keys.  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Facsimile User Tools  
C Enter the code for "Setup" with  
Fax Reset Timer  
the number keys.  
This machine automatically returns  
to standby display if you do not use  
the machine for a certain period of  
time. You can select this period.  
You can select 30 seconds, one  
minute, three minutes, or five min-  
utes for the period.  
D Enter the code for "Date/Time"  
using the number keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
E Select the month you wish to  
change using the [Month ] and  
[Month ] and enter the correct  
date or time using 0 or 1 key  
and the number keys.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
6
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Setup" with  
the number keys.  
Note  
Enter the time in 12-hour for-  
mat. Press [AM/PM] to select AM  
or PM.  
When you enter a date, the day  
D Enter the code for "Fax Reset Tim-  
is set automatically.  
er" with the number keys.  
Your machine excepts the date  
in 12 hours format.  
F Press [OK].  
G Press [PrevMenu ] twice.  
Note  
H Press the [Exit] to return to stand-  
If "Fax Reset Timer" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
by display.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setup  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select a peri- B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
od of time.  
with the number keys.  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Setup" with  
the number keys.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
D Enter the code for "On Hook Tim-  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
er" with the number keys.  
H Press [Exit] to return to standby  
mode.  
6
On Hook Timer  
Note  
This machine automatically cancels  
the On Hook Dial mode if you do not  
dial a number from the number keys  
for a certain period of time after  
pressing the {On Hook Dial} key. You  
can select this period.  
If "On Hook Timer" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select a peri-  
od of time.  
You can select one minute, three min-  
utes, five minutes or ten minutes for  
the period.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
153  
by mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Facsimile User Tools  
User Function Keys  
You can program each of the User Function keys ({F1} to {F10}) with a function  
that you use frequently. When you wish to use that function, instead of having  
to search through several menus to find it, just press the appropriate User Func-  
tion key. This procedure can be used to edit, delete or change the contents of the  
User Function keys.  
Functions You Can Assign to User Function Keys  
The following table lists the functions you can store in the User Function keys  
({F1} to {F10}).  
Function Name  
Description  
Indica- Reference  
tor  
Groups  
Allows you to specify the destination  
using a Group code.  
p.50 Using Groups,  
Economy  
Transmission  
Allows you to specify Economy  
Transmission.  
p.175 Economy  
Transmission”  
Fax Header Print  
Tone  
Allows you to make On/Off setting  
for Fax Header Print.  
p.32 Fax Header  
Print”  
6
Allows you to enter Tone/UUI.  
Features>  
Batch  
Transmission  
Allows you to make On/Off setting  
for Batch Transmission.  
p.105 Batch Transmis-  
sion”  
Stamp  
Allows you to make On/Off setting  
for Stamp.  
p.93 Stamp”  
Duplex Original  
Forwarding  
Allows you to scan a duplex original  
for transmission.  
Settings”  
Allows you to make On/Off setting  
for Forwarding.  
p.223 Forwarding”  
Sub-address *1  
Dial Option  
Allows you to enter a Sub-address.  
p.82 Sub-address”  
Allows you to send or receive fax  
messages with an ID  
(SUB/SEP/SID/PWD).  
p.78 SUB/SID (SUB  
p.80 SEP/PWD (SEP  
mission)”  
Line Selection *1  
Journal  
Allows you to select the telephone  
line for transmission.  
p.89 Selecting the  
Line”  
Allows you to print the Journal.  
p.50 Printing the Jour-  
nal”  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
User Function Keys  
Function Name  
Description  
Indica- Reference  
tor  
Internet Fax *1  
Allows you to enter texts such as an e-  
mail address.  
Chapter 2, "Transmis-  
sion," Chapter 3,  
"Transmission" and  
Chapter 5, "Using the  
Scanner Functions" in  
the NIC FAX Unit  
manual  
Automatic E-mail Allows you to make On/Off setting  
Chapter 2, "Automatic  
E-mail Reception" in  
the NIC FAX Unit  
manual  
Reception *1  
for Automatic E-mail Reception.  
E-mail Reception  
Allows you to receive e-mail manual-  
ly.  
Chapter 2, "Manual E-  
mail Reception" in the  
NIC FAX Unit manual  
*1  
*1  
Scanner  
Allows you to enter destinations for  
Internet Fax transmissions using the  
Scanner function.  
the NIC FAX Unit  
manual  
Communication  
Result Report  
Allows you to select whether to print  
the Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission) or Immedi-  
ate Transmission Result Report (Im-  
mediate Transmission).  
p.103 Checking the  
Transmission Result”  
6
Reception Mode  
Selection  
Allows you to select the Reception  
Mode.  
p.53 Selecting the Re-  
ception Mode, <Basic  
Features>  
Batch Original  
Documents Trans- using the Batch Original Documents  
mission Transmission function.  
Allows you to send a fax message by  
p.96 Batch Original  
Documents Transmis-  
sion”  
*1  
Option(s) required  
"" mark in the "Indicator" column indicates that the indicator on the User  
Function key is lit when the function is selected.  
The following functions are pre-assigned to User Function keys:  
{F1}: Journal  
{F2}: Fax Header Print  
{F3}: Stamp  
{F4}: Groups  
The following functions are also pre-assigned to User Function keys if your  
machine is Type2:  
{F5}: Internet Fax  
{F10}: Scanner  
Note  
You can check the functions assigned to the User Function keys on the "Quick  
Dial Key Label (Dial Label)." See p.73 Quick Dial Key Label (Dial Label),  
<Basic Features>.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Facsimile User Tools  
D Press the User Function key ({F1}  
Registering/Editing the  
Contents of a User Function  
Key  
to {F10}) you wish to use.  
There are two types of programming  
methods.  
Programming the contents of a  
User Function key by specifying a  
function code with the number  
keys  
Programming a User Function key  
Note  
on the job  
If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel], and then press the cor-  
rect key.  
Note  
The function that is already as-  
signed to a User Function key can-  
not be assigned to another User  
Function key.  
Checking the Contents of User  
Function Keys Currently  
Programmed  
6
Programming by Specifying a Function  
Code with the Number Keys  
A Press [Status].  
B Press the User Function key  
({F1} to {F10}) you wish to reg-  
ister or edit.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the number of the "Fax Fea-  
Note  
tures".  
You can also select the User  
Function key to store the pro-  
gram in from the status  
screen.  
If you press [OK], the display  
in step D appears.  
The "Fax Features" main menu ap-  
pears.  
E Enter the code you wish to regis-  
ter into the User Function key us-  
ing the number keys.  
C Enter the code for "User Func-  
tions" using the number keys.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Function Keys  
The following example procedure de-  
scribes how to store the time setting  
for Send Later in User Function key  
{F5}.  
Note  
To see a function number not  
displayed on the display, press  
[Prev.] or [Next].  
A Press [Mode].  
If another function is already  
registered, press the {Clear} key  
or the {Stop} key to delete it.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the func-  
tion is not stored and the dis-  
play shown in step D appears  
again.  
B Enter the code for "Send Later"  
If you press another User Func-  
tion key here, you can register  
or edit another function by fol-  
lowing the procedure described  
above.  
with the number keys.  
6
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
C Press {F5}.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Programming a User Function Key on the  
Job  
D Press [Yes].  
When carrying out an operation from  
the control panel, you can store the  
various operations that you have per-  
formed so far in a User Function key.  
Once stored, just press that User  
Function key when the standby dis-  
play is shown to carry out those oper-  
ations.  
Note  
{F5} is registered and the display  
showing the operation in progress  
reappears.  
You cannot store the following op-  
erations in User Function keys:  
User Function settings  
Quick Dial, Speed Dial, Group  
Number, File No, Confidential  
ID, Memory Lock ID, or Opera-  
tions carried out after specify-  
ing a User Code (SUB code).  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Facsimile User Tools  
Note  
Deleting Functions Stored in  
User Function Keys  
The operation you have stored  
is shown as "Custom Functions"  
on the display.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Using a User Function Key  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
A Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) in which the function  
you wish to use is stored.  
C Enter the code for "User Func-  
tions" with the number keys.  
6
The stored function's display is  
shown.  
Example: "Journal Print"  
D Press the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) that you wish to clear.  
Note  
If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel] and try again.  
Checking the currently stored  
function  
A Press [Status].  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Function Keys  
B Press the User Function key  
you wish to clear.  
Note  
You can also select the User  
Function key to clear from  
the status screen.  
If you press [OK], the func-  
tion is not deleted and the  
display in step D reappears.  
E Press the {Stop} key to clear the  
User Function.  
6
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the func-  
tion is not deleted and the dis-  
play in step D reappears.  
To clear other User Function  
keys, press the User Function  
key ({F1} to {F10}) and proceed  
as before.  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile User Tools  
Fax On Demand  
This feature requires the optional Fax On Demand unit.  
Fax On Demand lets you store docu-  
ments in memory with a number at-  
tached (the box number). When  
another party wishes to receive the  
message, they make a transmission  
request to your machine specifying  
the box number containing the docu-  
ment they wish to receive.  
Registering/Editing Fax On  
Demand Documents  
This procedure describes how to store  
a document using Fax On Demand  
and assign it a name.  
Note  
Preparation  
a document, we recommend that  
you print the Fax On Demand List  
to verify the stored contents. See  
p.165 Printing the Fax On De-  
mand List.  
You can turn this function on or  
off. See p.197 Fax On Demand Re-  
ception.  
Note  
password with User Parameters.  
The password is the Remote ID.  
See p.178 User Parametersand  
p.199 Registering ID Codes.  
You can register up to 99 docu-  
6
ments with this feature.  
step G.  
If you wish to edit a document, de-  
lete it, then register it again. See  
p.162 Deleting Fax On Demand  
Documents.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Fax On Demand  
C Enter the code for "Fax On De- F Press [Name].  
mand" with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Program FOD"  
with the number keys.  
G Enter a name for this box, then  
press [OK].  
Note  
If "Program FOD" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
E Enter the box number to store the  
document in.  
6
Note  
If this name is already regis-  
tered, it is displayed. To change  
the name, press the {Clear} key  
or the {Stop} key and enter it  
again.  
To Check Currently Registered  
Documents  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
A Press [Status].  
<Basic Features>  
B Enter the box number to store  
H Set the original.  
the document in.  
I Press the {Start} key to scan in  
Note  
your original.  
You can also specify the box  
number to program from the  
status screen.  
When scanning has finished, the  
document is stored.  
If a free box number is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or  
[Next] until one is.  
J Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
K Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
If you press [Cancel], the dis-  
by mode.  
play in step E reappears.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                 
Facsimile User Tools  
E Enter the number of the box you  
Deleting Fax On Demand  
Documents  
wish to delete.  
Follow these steps to delete a docu-  
ment stored using Fax On Demand.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
To check currently registered  
documents  
A Press [Status].  
B Enter the number of the box to  
delete.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
You can also specify the box  
number to delete from the  
status screen.  
6
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
mand" with the number keys.  
If a free box number is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or  
[Next] until one is.  
If you press [Cancel], the dis-  
Note  
play in step E reappears.  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
If the Box you specified is empty  
A The display below appears,  
followed by the display shown  
in step E. Enter the box number  
again.  
D Enter the code for "Delete FOD"  
with the number keys.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax On Demand  
B Press [Yes].  
F Choose one of the following pro-  
cedures.  
Deleting just the document  
A Press [Document].  
Note  
If you press [No], the display  
in step E reappears.  
Deleting both document and label  
B Press [Yes].  
A Press [Both].  
6
Note  
B Press [Yes].  
If you press [No], the display  
in step E reappears.  
Deleting just the label  
A Press [Label].  
Note  
If you press [No], the display  
in step E reappears.  
G Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                 
Facsimile User Tools  
To Check Currently Registered  
Documents  
Printing Fax On Demand  
Documents  
A Press [Status].  
Follow these steps to print out a doc-  
ument stored using Fax On Demand.  
B Enter the number of the box to  
delete.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
You can also specify the box  
number to print from the sta-  
tus screen.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
If a free box number is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or  
[Next] until one is.  
If you press [Cancel], the dis-  
play in step E reappears.  
6
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
mand" with the number keys.  
If the Box you specified is empty  
A The display below appears,  
followed by the display shown  
in step E. Enter the box number  
again.  
Note  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
D Enter the code for "Print File"  
with the number keys.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
E Enter the number of the box you  
wish to print.  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step E reappears.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax On Demand  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Printing the Fax On Demand  
List  
Note  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Printing the Fax On Demand  
Access Report  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
Print this report to find out how many  
pages have been sent successful-  
ly/unsuccessfully with the Fax On  
Demand feature.  
6
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
mand" with the number keys.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
Note  
with the number keys.  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
D Enter the code for "Print List"  
with the number keys.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Facsimile User Tools  
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
Fax On Demand Recorded  
Messages  
mand" with the number keys.  
When a caller requests a Fax On De-  
mand document, the machine plays  
back appropriate guidance messages.  
This section describes how to record  
these messages.  
Note  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
You can record the following sev-  
en messages, each of which can be  
up to 30 seconds long:  
D Enter the code for "Access Report"  
with the number keys.  
Mes-  
sage  
Num- Message  
ber  
Type  
Example  
1
Greeting  
message  
"This is the XYZ  
fax information  
service."  
Note  
If "Access Report" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
6
2
3
4
Password "Please enter the  
input password fol-  
guidance lowed by a #  
(pound sign) char-  
E Press the {Start} key.  
acter."  
Box num- "Press # twice to  
ber input get box one, or en-  
guidance ter the box number  
1
you need followed  
by a # character."  
Note  
Box num- "If you require an-  
ber input otherbox, enterthe  
guidance number followed  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
2
by a # character. To  
finish press #  
twice."  
F Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
5
Transmis- "Please press the  
sion guid- Start key to begin  
by mode.  
ance  
transmission."  
6
7
Re-enter  
guidance again."  
"Please enter  
Redial  
"Please dial again."  
guidance  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Fax On Demand  
By tailoring message 3, you can di-  
rect callers to just download the  
document stored in box 1, or have  
them choose any of up to five box-  
es.  
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
mand" with the number keys.  
You can also choose whether a  
password is required with User  
Parameters. When turned off, mes-  
sage 2 is skipped.  
Note  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Recording the Fax On Demand Recorded  
Messages  
D Enter the code for "Record Mes-  
sage" with the number keys.  
Preparation  
Before you begin, plug the micro-  
phone into the socket provided on  
the right side of the machine.  
Note  
If "Record Message" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
6
E Enter the code for "Record Guid-  
ance" with the number keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Enter the number of the message  
you wish to record with the num-  
ber keys.  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If the item you require is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or [N-  
ext] until it is.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Facsimile User Tools  
G Press [Start] then speak the mes- J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
sage into the microphone.  
by mode.  
As you speak, the remaining time  
available is shown on the display.  
Checking the Fax On Demand Recorded  
Messages  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
B Enter the code for "Fax Features"  
with the number keys.  
Each of the messages can be up  
to 30 seconds long.  
If there is still time left when  
you have finished your mes-  
sage, press [Stop].  
6
C Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
mand" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
H Press [OK].  
D Enter the code for "Record Mes-  
sage" with the number keys.  
Note  
Note  
Press [Replay] to listen to the  
message you have just record-  
ed.  
If "Record Message" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
I Press [PrevMenu] four times.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax On Demand  
E Enter the code for "Confirm Guid-  
How Callers Use Fax On Demand  
ance" with the number keys.  
Note  
Callers must wait until messages  
have completely finished playing  
before pressing a key.  
If the password option is turned on  
with User Parameters, you need to  
inform the calling party of the  
password beforehand.  
F Enter the number of the message  
you wish to confirm with the  
number keys.  
The Remote ID is used as the pass-  
word.  
Callers can request the contents of  
up to 5 boxes in one call.  
Note  
Message 6 (please enter again) is  
If the item you require is not  
displayed, press [Prev.] or [N-  
ext] until it is.  
played when:  
The box number has not been  
entered correctly.  
No key press was detected  
within 5 seconds after prompt-  
ing for the box number (mes-  
sage 3).  
6
The password has not been en-  
G Listen to the message.  
tered within 5 seconds.  
Message 7 (please call again) is  
played when:  
The wrong password has been  
entered 3 times in a row.  
Note  
An empty box has been selected  
To stop the message being  
played, press [Cancel].  
3 times in a row.  
Message 3 has been played  
three times because no key  
press was detected.  
H Press [PrevMenu] four times.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
Message 6 has been played  
twice because no key press was  
detected within 5 seconds.  
by mode.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Facsimile User Tools  
When the Password Is Turned On  
When the Password Is Turned Off  
A Dial using On Hook Dial, or lift A Dial using On Hook Dial, or lift  
the handset and dial.  
the handset, and then dial.  
You will hear message 1.  
Now do one of the following:  
You will hear message 1, then 2.  
B Enter the password with the num-  
ber keys, then press the {q} key.  
To choose one or more boxes  
You will hear message 3.  
Now do one of the following:  
A Enter the box number with the  
number keys, and then press  
the {q} key.  
To choose one or more boxes  
You will hear message 4.  
A Enter the box number with the  
number keys, then press the  
{q} key.  
Note  
To download another box,  
enter another box number,  
and then press the {q} key.  
You will hear message 4.  
Note  
B Press the {q} key twice.  
6
To download another box,  
enter the box number, and  
then press the {q} key.  
You will hear message 5.  
To choose box 1 only  
B Press the {q} key twice.  
You will hear message 5.  
A Press the {q} key twice.  
You will hear message 5.  
To choose box 1 only  
B Press the {Start} key to begin re-  
A Press the {q} key twice.  
ceiving.  
You will hear message 5.  
C Press the {Start} key to begin re-  
ceiving.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7. Key Operator Settings  
Accessing the Key Operator Tools  
This section describes settings of functions that are mainly managed by key op-  
erators, such as various types of ID codes, type of telephone line the machine is  
connected to, User Parameters, or destinations for transmissions.  
The functions that are available for setting are listed below. Please see the refer-  
enced page for more information.  
Necessary Options:  
*1 Extra G3 Interface Unit  
*2 ISDN Unit  
*3 Fax On Demand Unit  
*4 NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1)  
*5 Paper Tray Unit, or Optional Bypass Tray Unit  
*6 Function Upgrade Unit  
*7 40MB Memory Card  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
System  
Economy  
Allows you to take advantage of off-peak p.175 Econo-  
Settings  
Transmission  
line rates. Register the off-peak hours.  
my Transmis-  
sion”  
Night Timer  
Allows you to register the time for turn- p.176 Night  
ing on/off the heater of the fusing unit.  
You can cut costs by turning the power off  
when nobody uses the machine, such as at  
night or holidays.  
Timer”  
User  
Parameters  
Allow you to customize various settings p.178 User Pa-  
to match your needs. rameters”  
UserParameter Allows you to print and check the details p.189 Printing  
List  
of the User Parameter settings.  
the User Pa-  
rameter List”  
G3 Analog Line  
G31 Analog Line  
p.189 G3 Ana-  
Allows you to register Own Fax Num- log Line”  
ber, PSTN Line Type, and PSTN Ac-  
cess Number if the machine is  
connected to a G3 analog line.  
G32 Analog Line *1  
Allows you to register Own Fax Num-  
ber, PSTN Line Type, and PSTN Ac-  
cess Number if the optional Extra G3  
Interface Unit is installed.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key Operator Settings  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
System  
Settings  
G3 Digital Line Allows you to register Own Fax Number, p.192 G3 Digi-  
*2  
Sub-address, and CSI if the machine is  
connected to a G3 digital line.  
tal Line”  
G4 Digital Line Allows you to register Own Fax Number, p.194 G4 Digi-  
*2  
Sub-address, and G4 Terminal ID if the  
machine is connected to a G4 digital line.  
tal Line”  
Fax On  
Allows you to specify on/off setting for  
p.197 Fax On  
Demand  
Fax On Demand function and the recep- Demand Re-  
tion conditions. ception”  
Reception *3  
Registering ID Allows you to register ID codes for using p.199 Regis-  
Codes  
the following features: Polling Transmis- tering ID  
sion/Reception, Transfer Request, ID  
Transmission/Reception, Confidential  
Transmission (Default ID), Confidential  
Reception, Remote Transfer, and Fax On  
Demand.  
Codes”  
File Retention  
Allows you to specify the duration for  
which the machine retains the failed  
transmission data in memory.  
p.201 File Re-  
tention”  
Transfer  
Report  
Register your fax number to have the  
p.202 Transfer  
Transfer Result Report sent back from the Report”  
Transfer Station when making a Transfer  
Request.  
7
Network  
Allows you to make settings for connect- See Chapter 1,  
ing to a network when the NIC FAX Unit "Network Set-  
Settings *4  
(Option for Type1) is installed.  
tings" in the  
NIC FAX Unit  
manual.  
IP-Fax  
Specify settings for using the IP-Fax func- See Chapter 1,  
tion when the NIC FAX Unit (Option for "IP-Fax Param-  
Parameters *4  
Type1) is installed.  
eter Settings" in  
the NIC FAX  
Unit manual.  
System  
Parameter  
Transmission  
Allows you to have information about the p.204 System  
condition of your machine sent automati- Parameter  
cally to the nearest service representative. Transmission”  
Key Layout  
Allows you to select the key layout of  
characters assigned to Quick Dial keys.  
p.205 Key  
Layout”  
Print Position  
Allows you to make margin adjustments p.206 Print Po-  
if the image positioning varies depending sition”  
on the paper tray used when receiving fax  
messages or making copies.  
Memory File  
Transfer  
Allows you to specify the fax number of p.207Memory  
the destination when you wish to transfer File Transfer”  
all files stored in memory to another fax  
machine and print the data.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing the Key Operator Tools  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
System  
Settings  
Deleting  
Entries  
Allows you to delete a group of ID codes p.209 Delet-  
or destinations programmed into Quick  
Dial keys by specifying their type.  
ing Entries”  
Reset PM  
Counter  
Allows you to reset the counter for origi- p.211 Reset  
nals and printed paper when replacing  
the ADF Maintenance Kit or Fusing Main-  
tenance Unit.  
PM Counter”  
Initial Setup  
Multi-copy  
Reception  
Allows you to have the machine print  
multiple copies of messages from speci-  
fied senders or messages from senders  
other than those you specify.  
p.214 Multi-  
copy Recep-  
tion”  
Authorized  
Reception  
Allows you to block out fax messages  
from specified senders or messages from rized Recep-  
senders other than those you specify. tion”  
p.217 Autho-  
Specified Tray Allows you to specify the paper tray used p.220 Speci-  
*5  
for printing fax messages from specified fied Tray”  
senders or messages from senders other  
than those you specify.  
Forwarding  
Allows you to forward incoming fax mes- p.223 For-  
sages to the registered destinations. You warding”  
can specify different destinations for each  
sender.  
Memory Lock Allows you to have the fax messages from p.233Memory  
specified senders or messages from send- Lock”  
ers other than those you specify stored in  
memory without printing.  
TX/RX File  
Save *6 *7  
Allows you to turn on or off this function. p.236 TX/RX  
You can also register the sender of fax  
messages that you wish to receive.  
File Save Set-  
tings”  
Backup File  
Allows you to register the destination that p.243 Backup  
Transmission  
the machine automatically sends all mes- File Transmis-  
sages to for backup purposes.  
sion Settings”  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Function Name  
Description  
Reference  
Box Settings  
Registering/  
Allows you to register, edit, or delete Per- p.246Personal  
Editing/  
sonal Boxes. Boxes”  
Deleting  
Personal Boxes  
Registering/  
Editing/  
Allows you to register, edit, or delete In- p.251 Informa-  
formation Boxes.  
tion Boxes”  
Deleting Infor-  
mation Boxes  
Registering/  
Editing/  
Allows you to register, edit, or delete  
Transfer Boxes.  
p.254 Transfer  
Boxes”  
Deleting  
Transfer Boxes  
Printing the  
Box List  
Allows you to print the Box List.  
p.259 Printing  
the Box List”  
Note  
The code for each function that appears on the display varies depending on  
the installed options or function settings.  
7
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
System Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Economy Transmission  
tings" with the number keys.  
Economy Transmission allows you to  
take advantage of off-peak rates by  
delaying transmission of messages  
until a specified time.  
Follow the procedure below to speci-  
fy the Economy Transmission Time  
when the phone rates are lower.  
D Enter the code for "Economy TX"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
You can specify only one Economy  
Transmission Time.  
You can change the time setting by  
E Press the {Stop} key or the {Clear}  
key to clear the current timer set-  
ting.  
Reference  
p.5 Sending at a Specific Time  
(Send Later)”  
F Enter the Economy Transmission  
Time with the number keys. To  
change AM/PM, press [AM/PM].  
7
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
You can enter any time between  
01:00 and 12:59.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear} key or {Stop} key and  
enter the correct value.  
G Press [OK].  
Note  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
If you press [Cancel] , the en-  
tered time is canceled and the  
display shown in step D appears  
again.  
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Key Operator Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Night Timer  
tings" with the number keys.  
Use this feature to have the machine  
turn its heater on and off automatical-  
ly at the times that you prescribe. For  
example, by having the heater turned  
off during the night, on holidays or at  
other times when you are absent, you  
can cut power costs.  
D Enter the code for "Night Timer"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
You can program the timer to turn  
the heater on or off twice daily  
over a 1-week cycle.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select "On".  
Received fax messages are stored  
in memory (Substitute Reception)  
while the heater is turned off and  
not printed until the heater comes  
back on.  
You can edit previous settings for  
this feature by following the proce-  
dure described below.  
You cannot use the PC Printing  
function (option) while the heater  
is turned off by the Night Timer.  
7
To turn the timer Off  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
A Press the arrow key to select  
"Off".  
B Press [OK].  
C Press [PrevMenu] twice, then  
press [Exit].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. F Press [Set].  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
Note  
G Press [Next] to scroll through the  
days of the week and timers (1 or  
2).  
If you are programming the oth-  
er timer also for this day of the  
week, press [Next] to display  
the other timer (for example,  
"Set 2") and repeat this step.  
To set the other timer for anoth-  
er day of the week, press [Next]  
to display the other timer and  
select the day of the week.  
K Press [OK].  
Note  
The days of the week and timers  
(1 or 2) are displayed in the fol-  
lowing order: Sun. Set 1 Sun.  
Set 2 Mon. Set 1 Mon. Set 2  
Tue. Set 1 Tue. Set 2 →  
Wed. Set 1 Wed. Set 2 Thu.  
Set 1 Thu. Set 2 Fri. Set 1 →  
Fri. Set 2 Sat. Set 1 Sat. Set 2.  
L Press [OK].  
H Press the {Stop} key to clear the  
current timer setting.  
7
I Enter the time with the number  
keys. To change AM/PM, press  
[AM/PM]  
Note  
You can enter any time between  
01:00 and 12:59.  
M Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear} key or {Stop} key and  
enter the correct value.  
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
J Press 0 or 1 key to select wheth-  
er to turn the heater on or off at  
the set time.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Press {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key  
to inactivate the Night Timer tempo-  
rarily and print the received fax mes-  
sages if there are any.  
-The Message Displayed While  
the Heater is Turned Off  
While the Night Timer is activated  
and the heater is turned off, the mes-  
sage "Currently the machine is  
in Energy Saver Mode. Press  
[Clear Modes/Energy Saver] key  
to use functions." appears on the  
display.  
Then, if no operation is performed for  
about 5 minutes, the Night Timer  
turns the heater off again.  
User Parameters  
The User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to match your  
needs.  
Set the switches of each parameter to a new value to make changes to the set-  
tings.  
Preparation  
Some User Parameters require installation of optional equipment or opera-  
tions such as turning a function on or off before changing the switch values.  
Switches and Bits  
7
Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consists  
of eight bits, whose values are "0" or "1". The right most bit is bit 0 and the left  
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the  
value of bits between "0" and "1".  
bit 7  
bit 6  
bit 5  
bit 4  
bit 3  
bit 2  
bit 1  
bit 0  
Switch 00  
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note  
The diagram above describes the change of setting for bit 6 of switch 00 from  
"0" (Memory Transmission) to "1" (Immediate Transmission).  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Settings  
User Parameter List  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
00  
0
Stamp home position  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.93 Stamp”  
3,2,1  
5,4  
Image density adjustment  
level home position  
000: Normal  
001: Lighter  
010: Darker  
p.44 Image  
Density, <Basic  
Features>  
Resolution home position  
00: Standard  
01: Detail  
p.42 Resolu-  
tion, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
10: Super Fine  
11: Extra Super  
Fine  
6
Transmission Mode home  
position  
1: Immediate  
Transmission  
p.29 Switching  
between Memo-  
ry Transmission  
and Immediate  
Transmission,  
<Basic Features>  
0: Memory  
Transmission  
7
6
7
Halftone home position  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.44 Original  
Type, <Basic  
Features>  
01  
Emit a beep when a commu- 1: On  
nication is complete  
p.104Adjusting  
Volume, <Basic  
Features>  
7
0: Off  
Return the machine to the  
home settings after each  
communication  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.29 Switching  
between Memo-  
ry Transmission  
and Immediate  
Transmission,  
<Basic Features>,  
p.42 Resolu-  
tion, <Basic Fea-  
tures> and p.44  
OriginalType,  
<Basic Features>  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Key Operator Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
02  
0
Forwarding Mark  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.223 Forward-  
ing”  
1
Center Mark  
Print RX Time  
TSI Print  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.120 Center  
Mark”  
2
1: On  
0: Off  
p.121Reception  
Time”  
3
1: On  
0: Off  
p.123 TSI Print”  
4
Checkered Mark  
CIL Print  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.120 Check-  
5 *2  
6 *2  
0
1: On  
0: Off  
p.123 CIL  
Print”  
TID Print  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.123 CIL  
Print”  
03  
Print Communication Re-  
sult Report (Memory Trans-  
mission) automatically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.107 Commu-  
nication Result  
Report (Memo-  
ry Transmis-  
sion)”  
7
2
3
4
Print File Reserve Report  
(Memory Transmission) au-  
tomatically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.107 File Re-  
serve Report  
(Memory Trans-  
mission)”  
Print File Reserve Report  
(Polling Reception) auto-  
matically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.21 File Re-  
serve Report  
(Polling Recep-  
tion)”  
Print Communication Re-  
sult Report (Polling Recep-  
tion) automatically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.21 Communi-  
cation Result Re-  
Reception)”  
5
6
7
Print Immediate Transmis- 1: On  
p.103 Checking  
the Transmis-  
sion Result”  
sion Result Report automat-  
ically  
0: Off  
Print Polling Transmission 1: On  
p.25 Polling  
Transmission  
Clear Report”  
Clear Report automatically  
0: Off  
Print Journal automatically 1: On  
0: Off  
p.53 Printing  
the Journal”  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
04  
0
Print Confidential File  
Report automatically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.47 Confiden-  
tial File Report”  
1 *3  
Print Fax On Demand Ac-  
cess Report automatically  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.165 Printing  
the Fax On De-  
port”  
3
4
Print failed transmission re- 1: On  
p.103 Checking  
the Transmis-  
sion Result”  
sults in the Journal  
0: Off  
Give priority to the informa- 1: Print the Own p.50 Printing  
tion provided by the receiv- Name or Own the Journalp.65  
ing party when printing the Fax Number of Disk FileSearch  
Receiver's Name on Com-  
munication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission),  
Immediate Transmission  
Result Report, Journal, Disk  
File Search List/Visual List,  
and Error Report  
the receiving  
fax machine  
p.107 Commu-  
Report (Memo-  
ry Transmis-  
0: Print destina-  
tion names pro-  
grammed into  
Quick Dial keys  
or Speed Dials,  
or the fax num-  
ber that you en-  
tered  
sion)p.103  
Transmission  
Resultp.264  
Error Report”  
5
6
Reduce the size of the Jour- 1: On  
p.53 Printing  
the Journal”  
7
nal when printing it  
0: Off  
Print File Reserve Report  
when memory is full or a  
paper jam occurred  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.107 File Re-  
serve Report  
mission)”  
7
Print a portion of image on 1: On  
p.25 Polling  
File Reserve Report, Com-  
Transmission  
Clear Report”  
p.107 File Re-  
serve Report  
mission)p.107  
Communica-  
tion Result Re-  
port (Memory  
Transmission)”  
p.103 Checking  
the Transmis-  
sion Result”  
0: Off  
munication Result Report,  
Communication Failure Re-  
port, Polling Transmission  
Clear Report, and Transfer  
Result Report  
p.115 Transfer  
Result Report”  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
05  
0
1
Substitute Reception  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.111Substitute  
Reception”  
Condition for Substitute  
Reception  
1: If Own Name p.111Substitute  
or Own Fax  
Number is re-  
ceived  
Reception”  
0: All incoming  
fax messages  
3
High Temperature Standby 1: On  
p.300 Energy  
Saving”  
mode  
0: Off  
5,4  
Restricted Access  
00: Off  
01: On  
p.25 Restricted  
Access, <Basic  
Features>  
10: On when the  
Night Timer is  
on  
7,6  
0
Energy Saver mode  
00: Energy Sav- p.300 Energy  
er Standby  
mode  
Saving”  
01: Fax Standby  
mode  
06  
Print the Fax Header or CIL 1: On  
p.32 Fax Head-  
er Printp.123  
7
*2 on messages at the other  
0: Off  
end  
2
ID Transmission  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.94 ID Trans-  
mission”  
3 *2  
Send the Fax Header with  
G4 transmission  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.32 Fax Head-  
er Print”  
4
Batch Transmission  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.105 Batch  
Transmission”  
6
SPID (Own Fax Number 2) 1: On  
0: Off  
p.192G3Digital  
Linep.194 G4  
Digital Line”  
07  
2
3
Parallel Memory Transmis- 1: On  
p.105 Parallel  
Memory Trans-  
mission”  
sion  
0: Off  
Auto Reduction  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.93 Auto Re-  
duction”  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
08  
1,0  
Multi-copy Reception  
00: Off  
p.214 Multi-  
copy Reception”  
01: Copy mes-  
sages from  
specified send-  
ers  
11: Copy mes-  
sages from  
senders other  
than those you  
specify  
3,2  
Authorized Reception  
00: Off  
p.217 Autho-  
rized Reception”  
01: Receive  
messages from  
specified send-  
ers  
11: Receive  
messages from  
senders other  
than those you  
specify  
5,4 *4  
Specified Tray Selection  
00: Off  
p.220 Specified  
Tray”  
01: Messages  
from specified  
senders  
7
11: Messages  
from senders  
otherthanthose  
you specify  
7,6  
Forwarding  
00: Off  
p.223 Forward-  
ing”  
01: Forward  
messages from  
specified send-  
ers  
11: Forward  
messages from  
senders other  
than those you  
specify  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
09  
1,0  
Memory Lock  
00: Off  
p.233 Memory  
Lock”  
01: Messages  
from specified  
senders  
11: Messages  
from senders  
otherthanthose  
you specify  
3,2 *6  
TX/RX File Save  
00: Off  
p.236 TX/RX  
File Save Set-  
tings”  
01: Store mes-  
sages from  
specified send-  
ers  
11: Store mes-  
sages from  
senders other  
than those you  
specify  
4
5
Store fax documents for the 1: Enable  
p.88 Manual  
Dial”  
Memory Transmission  
while using the Manual Dial  
function  
0: Disable  
Forwarding function for  
messages intended for Spec-  
ified Senders (messages in-  
tended for receivers other  
than those you specified if  
the setting for switch 08 bits  
7,6 is "11") that are not regis-  
tered with a forwarding  
destination  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.223 Forward-  
ing”  
7
6
7
Requires the user to press  
[Add] when specifying desti-  
nations using Quick Dial  
keys successively  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.49 Using  
Quick Dials,  
<Basic Features>  
The output order of multi-  
ple sets of copies when us-  
ing the Copying feature  
1: Stack  
0: Sort  
p.127 Copying”  
10  
1
2
4
Two in One  
Image Rotation  
Rotate Sort  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.121 Two In  
One”  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.122 Image  
Rotation”  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.122 Rotate  
Sort”  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
10  
5 *5  
Use the optional Bypass  
Tray Unit exclusively for PC  
Printing  
1: On  
0: Off  
7
Halftone Mode  
1: Speed Mode p.44 Original  
Type, <Basic  
Features>  
0: Standard  
Mode  
11  
0
Transfer Request  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.28 Transfer  
Request”  
1 *2  
Selection of tone (PB) or  
UUI after tone (·)  
1: PB  
p.47 Tone,  
0: UUI  
2
Alarm for Blank Sheet De-  
tect function  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.101 Blank  
6
Print Forwarded Messages 1: On  
p.223 Forward-  
Locally  
ing”  
0: Off  
7
Polling Files After Trans-  
mission  
1: Store in mem- p.22 Polling  
ory  
Transmission”  
0: Delete after  
transmission  
12  
2
Toner Saver Mode  
Print Image Density  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.124 Toner  
saving”  
4,3  
00: Normal  
01: Lighter  
10: Darker  
7
Copying  
1: Disable  
0: Enable  
p.127 Copying”  
13  
1,0  
Use the main G3 line as an 01: PABX  
internal PABX or an outside  
line  
p.189 G3 Ana-  
log Line”  
00: Outside line  
3,2 *1  
Use the second G3 line as an 01: PABX  
internal PABX or an outside  
line  
p.189 G3 Ana-  
log Line”  
00: Outside line  
5 *2  
Respond to a transmission  
without Own Fax Number  
when your Own Fax Num-  
ber for ISDN is registered  
1: Off  
0: On  
p.192G3Digital  
Linep.194 G4  
Digital Line”  
6 *2  
Respond to a transmission  
received through an ISDN  
PBX unconditionally  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.89 Selecting  
the Line”  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
19  
2,1,0 *4 or *5 The paper tray used for  
printing Reports  
000: Not speci- p.50 Printing  
fied  
the Journal”  
p.149 Re-  
001: Main paper  
tray  
ports/Lists”  
010: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 2)  
011: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 3)  
100: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 4)  
101: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 5)  
111: Optional  
Bypass Tray  
Unit  
7,6,5 *4 or *5 The paper tray selected au- 001: Main paper p.127 Copying”  
tomatically when an origi-  
nal is set for making copies  
tray  
010: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 2)  
7
011: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 3)  
100: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 4)  
101: Optional  
Paper Tray Unit  
(tray 5)  
111: Optional  
Bypass Tray  
Unit  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Switch  
Bits  
Item  
Available  
Settings  
Reference  
20  
1*7  
Selection of "Ex. Super Fine" 1: Enable  
p.127 Copying”  
resolution for Copying  
0: Disable  
2
Selection of "Ex. Super Fine" 1: Enable  
p.42 Resolu-  
tion, <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
resolution for transmission  
0: Disable  
3*7  
Selection of "Ex. Super Fine" 1: Enable  
p.42 Resolu-  
tures>  
resolution for reception  
0: Disable  
4
Scanner Cleaning function  
1: On  
0: Off  
p.101 Scanner  
Cleaning Mes-  
sage”  
5
Use the User Code (name of 1: On  
p.32 Fax Head-  
the Personal Box) as the Fax  
Header  
er Print”  
0: Off  
7
Scanner Cleaning Message 1: Display  
p.101 Scanner  
sage”  
0: Not display  
21  
31  
0 *2  
7,6  
The line selected when you 1: ISDN  
p.86 Using On  
Hook Dial with  
ISDN”  
press the {On Hook Dial} key  
0: PSTN  
Duration of time before the 00: 15 min.  
p.300 Energy  
Saving”  
7
machine exits High Tem-  
01: 30 min.  
perature Standby Mode af-  
10: 60 min.  
ter a printing job is complete  
11: 120 min.  
Necessary Options:  
*1 Extra G3 Interface Unit  
*2 ISDN Unit  
*3 Fax On Demand Unit  
*4 Paper Tray Unit  
*5 Bypass Tray Unit  
*6 Function Upgrade Unit and Optional 40MB Memory Card  
*7 40MB Memory Card  
Limitation  
When setting User Parameters (switch 20 bits 1, 2, 3) for "Enable", the ma-  
chine may not be able to send or receive fax messages using multiple lines,  
or copy or print the received fax messages.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
D Enter the code for "User Parame-  
How to Set User Parameters  
ters" with the number keys.  
This section describes how to set User  
Parameters, using transmission mode  
as an example. To change the trans-  
mission mode from Memory Trans-  
mission to Immediate Transmission,  
you need to change the bit 6 of switch  
00 from 0 to 1.  
E Make sure that switch 00 is dis-  
played.  
Important  
Do not change any bit switches  
other than those listed in the previ-  
ous section.  
Note  
Note  
To show other switches, press  
You can print the User Parameter  
However, only the items of much  
importance or the items that you  
often use are included in the list.  
See p.189 Printing the User Pa-  
rameter List.  
[Switch] or [Switch].  
F Press number key {6} to change  
the value of bit 6 to 1.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
7
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
Note  
Each time you press number  
key {6}, the value switches be-  
tween 1 and 0.  
G Press [OK].  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
Note  
D Enter the code for "Prt. User  
Param." with the number keys.  
If you press [Cancel], the display  
in step D reappears.  
The bits are displayed in as-  
cending order from right to left,  
the right most bit being bit 0.  
Some items use multiple bits for  
their settings such as "Image  
density adjustment level."  
E Press the {Start} key to print the  
list.  
H Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
If you press [Cancel] before  
printing starts, the printing  
stops and the display shown in  
step D appears again.  
Printing the User Parameter  
List  
Print the User Parameter List manual-  
ly to check the current User Parame-  
ter settings.  
F Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
by mode.  
7
G3 Analog Line  
You need to make settings for the G3–  
1 Analog Line before you connect the  
machine to a standard G3 analog line,  
and for the G32 Analog Line to con-  
nect to a G3 analog line by installing  
the optional Extra G3 Interface Unit.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G3–1 Analog Line  
Own Fax Number (CSI) (up to  
20 digits)  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
Register an international identi-  
fication number as your Own  
Fax Number (Called Station  
Identification), which is passed  
to the other party when you  
send or receive a fax.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
PSTN Line Type  
Select whether the connected  
line uses tone or pulse dialing.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Key Operator Settings  
PSTN Access Number  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Use this setting if your machine  
is connected to a PBX that re-  
quires you to dial certain num-  
ber such as "0" followed by a  
pause to connect to the outside  
line. By registering "0" as the  
PSTN Access Number, a pause  
will be inserted automatically  
after the "0" when dialing.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G32 Analog Line  
Own Fax Number (CSI) (up to  
20 digits)  
Register an international identi-  
fication number as your Own  
Fax Number (Called Station  
Identification), which is passed  
to the other party when you  
send or receive a fax.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
PSTN Line Type  
Select whether the connected  
line uses tone or pulse dialing.  
PSTN Access Number  
7
Use this setting if your machine  
is connected to a PBX that re-  
quires you to dial certain num-  
ber such as "0" followed by a  
pause to connect to the outside  
line. By registering "0" as the  
PSTN Access Number, a pause  
will be inserted automatically  
after the "0" when dialing.  
D Enter the code for "G3 Analog  
Line" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "G3 Analog Line" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
The Own Fax Number (CSI) is  
passed to the other party when  
you send or receive a fax. When  
the Own Fax Number is received,  
it is shown on the display or print-  
ed on reports on the receiver's or  
sender's machine. The Own Fax  
Number works even if the receiver  
or sender uses a different make of  
machine.  
E Enter the code for either "G3-1  
Analog Line" or "G3-2 Analog  
Line" with the number keys.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
B Press 0 or 1 key to select a  
Note  
PSTN line type.  
"G3-2 Analog Line" appears  
only when the optional Extra  
G3 Interface Unit is installed.  
The setting procedure is the  
same for both lines.  
C Press [OK].  
F Depending on the setting you  
wish to register, use one of the  
following procedures:  
Registering a PSTN Access  
Number  
Registering Own Fax Number  
A Enter the code for "PSTN Ac-  
cess No." with the number  
keys.  
A Enter the code for "Own Fax  
Number" with the number  
keys.  
Note  
B Enter your Own Fax Number.  
The PSTN Access Number  
function is not available for  
On Hook Dialing, while the  
optional Handset is off the  
hook, or when dialing using  
the external telephone.  
7
Note  
B Enter PSTN Access Number  
The Own Fax Number (CSI)  
can contain a plus sign (+),  
numbers and spaces. Regis-  
ter your country code, area  
code (minus the leading ze-  
ro) and your fax number in  
that order.  
with the number key.  
Note  
C Press [OK].  
You can enter a number be-  
tween 0 and 9, or 00 and 99.  
Selecting a PSTN Line Type  
A Enter the code for "PSTN Line  
Type" with the number keys.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
C Press [OK].  
Note  
Before storing the sub-address,  
store the Sub-address function in a  
User Function key. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
Note  
If you are making settings for  
the "G31 Analog Line,"  
change the setting for the  
with User Parameters after  
registering the PSTN Access  
Number. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 13 bits 1,0).  
Own Fax Number (CSI) is an inter-  
national identification number  
that is transferred to the other par-  
ty during transmission or recep-  
tion. This information appears on  
the display of the other party's fax  
machine and is printed on their  
lists and reports. The Own Fax  
Number (CSI) feature works with  
other manufacturer's fax machines  
that support this feature.  
If you are making settings for  
the "G32 Analog Line,"  
change the setting for the sec-  
ond G3 line to PABX with  
User Parameters after regis-  
tering the PSTN Access  
Number. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 13 bits 3,2).  
After registering the Own Fax  
Number 1 or 2, you can make set-  
respond to incoming faxes that do  
not send their Own Fax Numbers  
with User Parameters. See p.178  
5).  
G Press [PrevMenu] four times.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
7
G3 Digital Line  
Reference  
p.89 Selecting the Line”  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
The following settings are available  
for G3 communications over ISDN:  
Own Fax Number 1  
Enter the number of the line  
(PSTN) the machine is connected  
to.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
SPID (Own Fax Number 2)  
are using two numbers for one  
line.  
Sub-address  
See p.82 Sub-address.  
Own Fax Number (CSI) (maxi-  
mum 20 characters)  
Enter Own Fax Number (Called  
Station Identification) that is trans-  
ferred to the other party during  
transmission or reception.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Registering your SPID (Own Fax  
Number 2)  
tings" with the number keys.  
A Enter the code for "SPID" with  
the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "G3 Digital  
Line" with the number keys.  
B Enter the fax number.  
Note  
If "G3 Digital Line" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
If your fax number is 123–  
4567890, enter "1234567890."  
E Depending on the setting you  
wish to register, use one of the  
following procedures:  
C Press [OK].  
Registering the Sub-address  
Registering your Own Fax  
Number 1  
A Enter the code for "Sub-ad-  
7
dress" with the number keys.  
A Enter the code for "Own Fax  
Number 1" with the number  
keys.  
B Enter the sub-address (4digit  
number).  
B Enter the fax number.  
C Press [OK].  
Note  
If your fax number is 123–  
4567890, enter "1234567890."  
C Press [OK].  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Registering the Own Fax Number  
(CSI)  
G4 Digital Line  
This function requires the optional ISDN  
Unit.  
A Enter the code for "Own Fax  
No.(CSI)" with the number  
keys.  
Register these settings before con-  
necting to the ISDN. You can store the  
following items:  
Own Fax Number 1  
Enter the number of the line (IS-  
DN) the machine is connected to.  
B Enter the Own Fax Number  
SPID (Own Fax Number 2)  
Enter the second fax number if you  
are using two numbers for one  
line.  
(CSI).  
Sub-address  
See p.82 Sub-address.  
Note  
G4 Terminal ID (TID) (maximum  
22 characters)  
Own Fax Number (CSI) can  
contain a plus sign (+), num-  
bers and spaces. Register  
your country code, area code  
(minus the leading zero) and  
your fax number in that or-  
der.  
The G4 Terminal ID (TID) feature  
is available only when you are sub-  
scribed to an ISDN service. TID is  
printed on the fax message re-  
ceived on the other end when you  
perform G4 transmission with IS-  
DN.  
7
C Press [OK].  
Note  
F Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
Before storing the sub-address,  
store the Sub-address function in a  
User Function key. See p.154 User  
Function Keys.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Contact your service representa-  
tive when you register or change  
the sub-address.  
The G4 Terminal ID (TID) consists  
of your country code, Own Digital  
Number (fax number) and Termi-  
nal Name, and is registered in that  
order. Company names are nor-  
mally used as Terminal Names.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
After registering Own Fax Num-  
ber 1 or 2, you can make settings so  
that the machine does not respond  
to incoming faxes that do not send  
their Own Fax Numbers with User  
rameters(switch 13 bit 5).  
E Depending on the setting you  
wish to register, use one of the  
following procedures:  
Registering your Own Fax  
Number 1  
Reference  
p.89 Selecting the Line”  
A Enter the code for "Own Fax  
Number 1" with the number  
keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the fax number.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
Note  
If your fax number is 123–  
4567890, enter "1234567890."  
7
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Press [OK].  
Registering Your SPID (Own Fax  
Number 2)  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
A Enter the code for "SPID" with  
the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "G4 Digital  
Line" with the number keys.  
B Enter the fax number.  
Note  
If "G4 Digital Line" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
If your fax number is 123–  
4567890, enter "1234567890."  
C Press [OK].  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
F Enter the Own digital Number  
Registering the Sub-address  
with the number keys.  
A Enter the code for "Sub-ad-  
dress" with the number keys.  
Note  
Make sure to store Own Dig-  
B Enter the sub-address (4digit  
ital Number.  
number).  
G Press [OK].  
H Enter the code for "Terminal  
Name" with the number keys.  
C Press [OK].  
Registering the G4 Terminal ID  
I Enter the Terminal Name.  
A Enter the code for "G4 Termi-  
nal ID" with the number keys.  
7
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
B Enter the code for "Country  
Code" with the number keys.  
J Press [OK].  
Note  
If the entered TID's total  
number of characters (coun-  
try code + Own Digital Num-  
ber + Terminal Name)  
exceeds 22, a message ap-  
pears asking you to enter the  
TID in 22 characters or less,  
and then the screen shown in  
step I is displayed. Enter a  
new Terminal Name, so that  
your TID's total number of  
characters is within the limit.  
C Enter your country code with  
the number keys.  
D Press [OK].  
E Enter the code for "Own Digi-  
tal No." with the number keys.  
K Press [PrevMenu].  
F Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
D Enter the code for "Fax On De-  
Fax On Demand Reception  
mand" with the number keys.  
This feature requires the optional Fax On  
Demand Unit.  
You can turn the Fax On Demand  
function on or off, set the password  
(whether the calling party needs to  
specify the password) or select the  
line type for the reception.  
Note  
If "Fax On Demand" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Note  
The Remote ID is used as the pass-  
Codes.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select "On  
(with ID)," "On (without ID)," or  
"Off."  
Reference  
p.160 Fax On Demand”  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
7
Note  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
To require the calling party to  
specify the password, select "On  
(with ID)," and select "On (with-  
password.  
The Remote ID is used as the  
password. See p.199 Register-  
ing ID Codes.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
F Press [Recept.] if you wish to set  
the line type for the reception.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
Proceed to step L if you are not  
specifying the line type.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
G Press 0 or 1 key to select "By  
port".  
The following screen is dis-  
played if the optional Extra  
G3 Interface Unit is installed:  
B Press [OK].  
Selecting an ISDN Line  
H Press [Port].  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select "By  
line".  
I Enter the code for the line type  
with the number keys.  
7
B Press [Indial], then select the  
own fax number.  
Note  
"ISDN" appears only when the  
optional ISDN Unit is installed.  
Selecting a PSTN Line  
A Press 0 or 1 key to select the  
Note  
line.  
To set the fax number for In-  
dial, press [Indial] and select  
the fax number for reception.  
Then press [OK].  
C Press [OK].  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
J Press [PrevMenu].  
Registering ID Codes  
ID codes are required when using  
transmission modes such as Polling  
Transmission or Confidential Mes-  
sages.  
Register the following types of ID  
code before using the transmission  
modes:  
K Press [OK].  
Confidential ID  
This ID is usually required for  
printing a message received with  
the Confidential Reception feature.  
See p.46 Printing a Confidential  
Message.  
Polling ID  
This ID is required for using the  
fer Request.) , Transfer Station  
fault ID Polling Transmission (See  
p.22 Polling Transmission.), De-  
p.19 Polling Reception.), ID  
Transmission (See p.94 ID Trans-  
mission.), and the ID Reception  
(See p.119 ID Reception.) func-  
tions. When using the ID Trans-  
mission feature, register the same  
Polling ID as the other party does.  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
7
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Memory Lock ID  
This ID is required for printing a  
ry Lock feature. Register this ID  
when you specify the destinations  
for Memory Lock. See p.48 Print-  
ing a Memory-locked Message.  
Register the ID that is used for the  
Remote Transfer Request and Fax  
On Demand feature. See p.116  
Remote Transferand p.160 Fax  
On Demand.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
You can check the registered ID  
It is recommended that you print  
and keep the list after you register  
or edit IDs. See p.189 Printing the  
User Parameter List.  
You cannot receive faxes with the  
Confidential Reception feature  
without registering the Confiden-  
tial ID beforehand.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
A Polling ID can be any combina-  
tion of four digits (0 - 9) or letters  
(A - F) except for 0000 and FFFF.  
A Confidential ID and Memory  
Lock ID can be any four digit nu-  
meric code except for 0000.  
D Enter the code for "ID Code" with  
You can edit the IDs already regis-  
tered in the machine following the  
same procedure for registering a  
new ID. When editing a registered  
ID, the current ID is displayed on  
the screen. Press the {Clear} key or  
the {Stop} key and enter the new  
ID.  
the number keys.  
7
Note  
If "ID Code" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it is.  
Registering  
E Enter the code for "Confidential  
Follow the procedure described be-  
low to register ID codes:  
ID" with the number keys.  
Example: Registering the  
Confidential ID  
F Enter the Confidential ID (4digit  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
number).  
Note  
If you enter the code incorrectly,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key and enter the correct  
code.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
G Press [OK].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
Note  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
To register other ID codes, re-  
peat the procedure from step E.  
tings" with the number keys.  
H Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
D Enter the code for "File Retention"  
with the number keys.  
File Retention  
The File Retention function allows  
you to have the fax file/document re-  
tained in memory if a connection  
could not be made to the other party  
during a Memory Transmission (even  
though the number was redialed the  
stipulated number of times). This  
function is activated when it is set to  
either "24 hours" or "72 hours."  
7
Note  
If "File Retention" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select the  
time or turn off this function.  
If a file/document is stored in memo-  
ing to scan it in again.  
Reference  
p.40 Re-sending a file”  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
G4 Fax Number  
The G4 Fax Number is usually reg-  
istered with the International Ac-  
cess Code such as "011," country  
code, area code (minus the leading  
zero), "-" (a pause), the fax number,  
and the sub-address with a "/"  
(slash) if you are using the sub-ad-  
dress in that order. You can use up  
to 29 digits.  
Transfer Report  
This section describes the procedure  
for registering the fax number of the  
line your machine is connected to as  
the return address for Transfer Re-  
quests.  
When you make a Transfer Request  
from this machine, the registered  
number is sent to the Transfer Station.  
The Transfer Station then sends back  
the Transfer Result Report to this fax  
number.  
Example: If your country code is 1,  
area code is 222, fax number is 123–  
4567 and the sub-address is 01, reg-  
ister the G4 Fax Number as  
"01112221234567/01."  
You can register a fax number (return  
address) for each telephone line your  
machine is connected to, as described  
below.  
Limitation  
If the line is being used (i.e. com-  
munication is in progress), you  
cannot register or edit the fax num-  
bers. Perform the procedure after  
the communication is complete.  
G3 Direct number  
The G3 Direct number is usually  
registered with the International  
Access Code such as "011," country  
code, area code (minus the leading  
zero), "-" (a pause), and the fax  
number in that order. You can use  
up to 16 digits.  
Note  
The Transfer Request function will  
not be activated unless the return  
address is registered. See p.28  
Transfer Request.  
7
Example: If your country code is 1,  
area code is 222, and fax number is  
1234567, register the G3 Direct  
number as "01112221234567."  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
G3 PABX Number  
The fax number for a PABX line is  
usually registered with the PABX  
Access Number, Department code,  
"-" (a pause), and the PABX num-  
ber in that order. You can use up to  
16 digits.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
Example: If your PABX Access  
Number is 8, Department code is  
12, and PABX number is 3456, reg-  
ister the G3 PABX Number as  
"8123456."  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Registering a G3 PABX Number  
tings" with the number keys.  
A Enter the code for "G3 PABX  
Number" with the number  
keys.  
D Enter the code for "Transfer Re-  
port" with the number keys.  
B Enter the fax number to be  
used as the return address.  
Note  
If "Transfer Report" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
C Press [OK].  
Registering a G4 Fax Number  
E Depending on the setting you  
wish to register, use one of the  
following procedures:  
A Enter the code for "G4 Fax  
Number" with the number  
keys.  
Registering a G3 Direct Number  
7
A Enter the code for "G3 Direct  
Number" with the number  
keys.  
B Enter the fax number to use as  
the return address.  
B Enter the fax number to be  
used as the return address.  
C Press [OK] .  
F Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
C Press [OK].  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
Network Settings  
Use of these settings requires the NIC  
FAX Unit (Option for Type1).  
Adjust these settings to set up the In-  
ternet Fax Feature (Option for Type1).  
For details, see Chapter 1, "Network  
Settings" in the NIC FAX Unit manu-  
al.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
IP-Fax Parameter Settings  
Use of these settings requires the NIC  
FAX Unit (Option for Type1).  
Adjust these settings to set up the IP-  
Fax Feature (Option for Type1).  
D Enter the code for "System Param.  
TX" with the number keys.  
For details, see Chapter 1, "IP-Fax Pa-  
rameter Settings" in the NIC FAX  
Unit manual.  
7
System Parameter Transmission  
Note  
This feature sends information about  
the condition of your machine to your  
nearest service representative. Follow  
these steps when your service repre-  
sentative requests you to.  
If "System Param. TX" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
This information is sent to the des-  
tination registered in your ma-  
chine by a service representative.  
The fax number registered by a  
service representative appears.  
This information is sent directly  
from the machine's memory to  
your service representative.  
The standby screen is displayed  
when the transmission is com-  
plete.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
System Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Key Layout  
tings" with the number keys.  
You can change the layout of charac-  
ters assigned to Quick Dial keys,  
which are used for entering charac-  
ters. Two types of layout are provid-  
ed, the QWERTY layout and the ABC  
layout.  
D Enter the code for "Key Layout"  
with the number keys.  
QWERTY Layout  
ABC Layout  
Note  
Note  
If "Key Layout" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is.  
E Press 0 or 1 key to select "QW-  
ERTY" or "ABCDEF".  
Set one of the keyboard labels that  
come with the machine on the con-  
trol panel according to choice.  
7
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
Print Position  
If "Print Position" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
If image positioning needs to be ad-  
justed slightly, adjust the margins for  
the appropriate tray (the main paper  
tray, the optional Paper Tray Units, or  
the optional Bypass Tray Unit).  
E Enter the code for the tray you  
wish to adjust the margins for  
with the number keys.  
Note  
You can adjust the top and left  
margins of paper in 9 increments.  
You can adjust the position of the  
printed image in 0.5mm (0.02 in.)  
increments.  
Note  
The main paper tray is dis-  
played as "Tray1", the optional  
Paper Tray Units as "Tray25",  
and the optional Bypass Tray  
Unit as "Bypass Tray".  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Enter the code for the margin you  
wish to adjust with the number  
keys.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
7
Note  
You can view the margins by  
entering the code for "Test  
Print", then pressing the {Start}  
key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
G Press 0 or 1 key to adjust the  
margin.  
D Enter the code for "Print Position"  
with the number keys.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
H Press [OK].  
Memory File Transfer  
The margins are set.  
The Memory File Transfer function  
enables you to send all messages cur-  
rently stored in memory to another  
fax and have them printed out there,  
if your machine cannot print because  
the toner or paper has run out. You  
need to specify the forwarding desti-  
nation when using this function.  
Note  
If you wish to adjust another  
margin for the same tray, repeat  
the procedure from step F.  
If you wish to adjust a margin  
for another tray, press [Prev-  
Menu], then repeat the proce-  
dure from step E.  
Note that all files stored in memory  
including Memorylocked messages  
are transferred when this function is  
activated. Use this function only in an  
emergency.  
I Press [PrevMenu] four times.  
J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
Note  
You cannot specify an e-mail ad-  
dress (NIC FAX Unit (Option for  
Type1) required) as the forward-  
ing destination.  
The printed image may not be  
complete if the margins are ex-  
cessively increased or de-  
creased depending on the  
received fax. It is recommended  
that you check the printed im-  
age by printing a sample docu-  
ment when make adjustments.  
The Fax Header is not added to the  
transferred messages.  
7
All messages are sent in a single  
transmission. The Confidential  
Messages and Memory-locked  
Messages as well as Auto Docu-  
ments are transferred and printed  
at the specified destination.  
All documents are not erased from  
memory regardless of whether for-  
warding was successful or not.  
Even if a transmission error occurs,  
messages are not resent.  
Details of the forwarding opera-  
tion are not printed in the Journal.  
p.98 Entering Characters, <Basic  
Features>  
sage”  
p.48 Printing a Memory-locked  
Message”  
p.99 Auto Document”  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
     
Key Operator Settings  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
The transmission to the specified  
destination begins.  
When the transmission has fin-  
ished, the machine returns to the  
standby mode.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
7
D Enter the code for "Mem. File  
Transf" with the number keys.  
Note  
If "Mem. File Transf" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
If no messages are stored in  
memory, the following message  
will appear." No matching  
file found.".  
E Enter the number of the fax ma-  
chine you wish to send to.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
Deleting Entries  
This feature allows you to delete a group of data stored in the machine such as  
ID codes or Quick Dials at once. It is a handy tool when you are moving to an  
office in another location or disposing of the machine. The types of data that you  
can delete by using this function are listed in the table below.  
Item  
Data type that you can delete  
List that is printed  
if any part of the  
data cannot be de-  
leted  
Registered ID Code Own Name, Fax Header, Own Fax Number, desti- p.189 Printing the  
nations for Backup File Transmission, all data User Parameter  
stored in the following functions: ID Code Registra- List”  
tion, G3 Analog Line, G3 Digital Line, G4 Digital  
Line  
Quick Dial  
Speed Dial  
Group Dial  
Box  
Quick Dial keys that are not specified in the settings p.149 Re-  
for Group, Program, Box or Auto Document  
ports/Lists”  
Speed Dials that are not specified in the settings for p.149 Re-  
Group, Program or Box ports/Lists”  
Group Dials that are not specified in the settings for p.149 Re-  
Program or Box  
ports/Lists”  
Boxes that do not store any received documents  
p.259 Printing the  
Box List”  
Programming  
Image Data  
Any programs  
p.149 Re-  
ports/Lists”  
Files stored for the Polling Transmission, Auto Doc- p.43 Printing a  
ument, Fax On Demand or Information Boxes fea- List of Files in  
tures  
Memory (Print TX  
File List)”  
Note  
If any part of the data cannot be deleted because it is specified to be transmit-  
ted with files stored in memory, the message "Some entries are also pro-  
grammed in other lists. They could not be deleted." appears and  
the list of data is printed.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Deleting Entries  
To delete entries, perform the follow-  
ing procedure.  
Example: When deleting all ID codes  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. F Press [Yes].  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
G Press [Yes] to confirm the dele-  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tion.  
tings" with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Delete Entries"  
with the number keys.  
All IDs stored in the machine's  
memory are deleted.  
7
Note  
Note  
If you press [No], the deletion is  
cancelled and the display in  
step E reappears.  
If "Delete Entries" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is displayed.  
To continue deleting other en-  
tries, start the procedure from  
step E.  
E Enter the code for "All IDs" with  
the number keys.  
H Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
I Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Note  
If "All IDs" is not displayed,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is displayed.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
Reset PM Counter  
tings" with the number keys.  
Follow the procedure described be-  
low to clear the counters that count  
the sheets of documents and printed  
paper when replacing the ADF Main-  
tenance Kit or Fusing Maintenance  
Unit.  
D Enter the code for "Reset PM  
Counter" with the number keys.  
If the counters are not cleared, it is not  
possible to notify the right time for  
the next replacement. Make sure to  
clear the counters.  
When replacing the ADF Maintenance  
Kit  
Note  
If "Reset PM Counter" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Clear the ADF roller counter.  
See the Replacing Instructions that  
come with the ADF Maintenance  
Kit.  
E Press [Prev.] or [Next] until the  
counter you wish to clear is dis-  
played.  
When replacing the Fusing Mainte-  
nance Unit  
Clear the fusing unit counter and  
the transfer roller counter (clearing  
one counter will automatically  
clear the other).  
7
See the Replacing Instructions that  
come with the Fusing Maintenance  
Unit.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
When changing the ADF Main-  
tenance Kit, clear the ADF roller  
counter.  
When changing the Fusing  
Maintenance Unit, clear the fus-  
ing unit or transfer roller  
counter (clearing one counter  
will automatically clear the oth-  
er).  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
F Press [Reset].  
RDS (Remote Diagnostic  
System)  
If your machine has a problem, a ser-  
vice representative can perform vari-  
ous diagnostic tasks over the  
telephone line from the service sta-  
tion to try to find out what is wrong  
with your machine. The service repre-  
sentative can also use RDS to change  
some of your machine's settings, if  
you request it.  
Note  
If you press [OK], the screen in  
step D reappears.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
G Press [Yes] to clear the counter.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
7
Note  
If you press [No], the screen in  
step F reappears.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
H Press [OK].  
C Enter the code for "System Set-  
tings" with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "RDS" with the  
Note  
number keys.  
If you wish to clear another  
counter, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
to select the item.  
I Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
Note  
by mode.  
If "RDS" is not displayed, press  
[Prev.] or [Next] until it is.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Settings  
E Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
function on or off.  
F Press [OK].  
G Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
H Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
7
by mode.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Initial Set Up  
You can use up to 20 characters  
when registering one item of Spec-  
ified Senders for the G3 communi-  
cation, and 24 characters for the G4  
communication. You can also  
specify wildcards. See p.98 Enter-  
ing Characters, <Basic Features>.  
Multi-copy Reception  
Use this feature to have the machine  
print multiple copies of messages  
from Specified Senders. If no Speci-  
fied Senders are registered, the ma-  
chine prints multiple copies of all  
messages, regardless of sender.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of the same make as your  
machine, register the sender's name  
registered to their machine. If the  
Specified Sender's fax machine is of  
a different make, register the fax  
number. See p.55 Own Name/Fax  
Header/Own Fax Number, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
Note  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
or sender's fax number registered  
to the fax machines of Specified  
Senders on the Journal. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
Multiple copies cannot be made of  
messages received using Polling  
Reception and Free Polling Recep-  
tion, as well as Confidential Mes-  
sages and Memory-locked  
Messages.  
7
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
the values of settings according to  
your needs.  
You can specify the number of cop-  
ies from 1 to 9.  
You can choose to print a specified  
number of copies of messages  
from Specified Senders, or to print  
specified number of copies of mes-  
sages from senders other than  
Specified Senders with User Pa-  
rameters. See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 08 bits 1,0).  
Setting up Multi-copy Reception  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
You can register the Specified  
Senders for the following six func-  
tions: Multi-copy Reception, Au-  
thorized Reception, Specified  
Tray, Forwarding, Memory Lock,  
TX/RX File Save. The maximum  
number of Specified Senders is 50  
in total.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Initial Set Up  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. F Enter the code for "Program Send-  
Tools" with the number keys then  
er" with the number keys.  
press the {q} key.  
G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key to  
clear it and enter the correct  
code. If you enter the code in-  
correctly with the two digits,  
press [Cancel] in step H.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Multi-copy  
Recp." with the number keys.  
7
H Press [Sender].  
E Press [Sender].  
I Enter the sender name or sender  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
Note  
If you do not wish to register a  
Specified Sender, proceed to  
step O.  
If there is no registered Speci-  
fied Senders, multiple copies of  
all incoming messages are  
made.  
Note  
You can use Alphabets, sym-  
bols, numbers, or a space when  
entering the sender name or  
sender number.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Reference  
N Press [Exit].  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
J Press [OK].  
K Choose whether to store this item  
as a wildcard.  
O Enter the number of copies to be  
printed with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
Note  
You can specify the number of  
copies from 1 to 9.  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
Multi-copy Reception is activat-  
ed when the number of copies is  
set to 2 and above, and inacti-  
vated when it is set to 1.  
7
P Press [OK].  
Q Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
R Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
Senders as necessary.  
Reference  
p.239 Deleting Specified Send-  
ers.  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Set Up  
sages from Specified Senders, or  
from senders other than Specified  
Senders with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch 08  
bits 3,2).  
Printing the Specified Sender List  
You can check the registered Speci-  
Reference  
You can register the Specified  
Senders for the following six func-  
tions: Multi-copy Reception, Au-  
thorized Reception, Specified  
Tray, Forwarding, Memory Lock,  
TX/RX File Save. The maximum  
number of Specified Senders is 50.  
See p.241 Printing the Specified  
Sender Listfor the printing proce-  
dure.  
Authorized Reception  
You can use up to 20 characters  
when registering one item of Spec-  
ified Senders for the G3 communi-  
cation, and 24 characters for the G4  
communication. You can also  
specify wildcards. See p.98 Enter-  
ing Characters, <Basic Features>.  
You can block out unwanted fax mes-  
sages by registering Specified Send-  
ers for Authorized Reception and  
choosing to receive faxes only from  
those senders. If a fax machine other  
than those specified as Specified  
Senders tries to send you a message,  
the line is disconnected immediately  
after the connection is established.  
This feature is useful, for example, if  
you wish to block out junk faxes. You  
can also choose to receive faxes from  
senders other than those you specify  
as the Specified Senders.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of the same make as your  
machine, register the sender's  
name registered to their machine.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of a different make, regis-  
ter the fax number.  
7
or sender's fax number registered  
to the fax machines of Specified  
Senders on the Journal. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
Limitation  
If you do not register any Specified  
Senders, you cannot set up this  
function.  
Note  
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
the values of settings according to  
your needs.  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
Authorized Reception is not avail-  
able for Polling Reception.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Key Operator Settings  
F Enter the code for "Program Send-  
Setting up Authorized Reception  
er" with the number keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
Note  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key to  
clear it and enter the correct  
code. If you enter the code in-  
correctly with the two digits,  
press [Cancel] in step H.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
7
H Press [Sender].  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Authorized  
RX" with the number keys.  
I Enter the sender name or sender  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
E Press [Sender].  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Set Up  
Note  
Note  
You can use letters, symbols,  
numbers, or spaces when enter-  
ing the sender name or sender  
number.  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
N Press [Exit].  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
J Press [OK].  
K Choose whether to store this item  
as a wildcard.  
O Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
function on or off.  
Reference  
7
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
P Press [OK].  
L Press [OK].  
Q Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
R Press [Exit ] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
M Press [PrevMenu].  
Reference  
See p.239 Deleting Specified  
Sendersfor the deleting proce-  
dure.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
The Specified Tray function is not  
activated when receiving messag-  
es with Polling Reception or Free  
Polling Reception.  
Printing the Specified Sender List  
You can check the registered Speci-  
Register the Own Name or Own  
Fax Number of the other party as  
the Specified Sender. If the other  
party has not registered their Own  
Name or Own Fax Number, you  
cannot register them as a Specified  
Sender.  
Reference  
See p.241 Printing the Specified  
Sender Listfor the printing proce-  
dure.  
You can choose to print messages  
es from senders other than Speci-  
fied Senders using the main paper  
tray with User Parameters. See  
p.178 User Parameters(switch 08  
bits 5,4).  
Specified Tray  
This function requires the optional Paper  
Supply Unit.  
The Specified Tray function enables  
you to have messages from Specified  
Senders printed using one paper tray,  
and messages from other senders to  
be printed using another paper tray.  
You can register the Specified  
Senders for the following six func-  
tions: Multi-copy Reception, Au-  
thorized Reception, Specified  
Tray, Forwarding, Memory Lock,  
TX/RX File Save. The maximum  
number of Specified Senders is 50.  
For example, if green paper is set in  
the main paper tray, and white paper  
is set in the optional Paper Tray Unit,  
you can distinguish the senders of the  
message at a glance by choosing to  
have messages from Specified Send-  
ers printed using the main paper tray  
and messages from others printed us-  
ing the optional Paper Tray Unit.  
7
You can use up to 20 characters  
when registering one item of Spec-  
ified Senders for the G3 communi-  
cation, and 24 characters for the G4  
communication. You can also  
specify wildcards. See p.98 Enter-  
ing Characters, <Basic Features>.  
Note  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
When one optional Paper Tray  
Unit is installed, load the optional  
Paper Tray Unit and the main pa-  
per tray with paper of the same  
size. When two optional Paper  
Tray Units are installed, load the  
main paper tray with paper of the  
same width as that of the largest  
width loaded in the paper supply  
units.  
The Specified Tray function is not  
available for the optional Bypass  
Tray Unit. You need to have the  
optional Paper Tray Unit(s). Type1  
has two paper tray units as stan-  
dard.  
If you do not set paper in the way  
described above, Substitute Recep-  
tion may take place even if paper is  
set.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Initial Set Up  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of the same make as your  
machine, register the sender's  
name registered to their machine.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of a different make, regis-  
ter the fax number.  
D Enter the code for "Specified  
Tray" with the number keys.  
or sender's fax number registered  
to the fax machines of Specified  
Senders on the Journal. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
E Press [Sender].  
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
the values of settings according to  
your needs.  
Note  
Setting up Specified Tray  
If you do not wish to register a  
Specified Sender, proceed to  
step O.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
If you do not register any Speci-  
fied Senders, all incoming faxes  
will be printed using the main  
paper tray.  
7
F Enter the code for "Program Send-  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
er" with the number keys.  
G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
K Choose whether to store this item  
as a wildcard.  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key to  
clear it and enter the correct  
code. If you enter the code in-  
correctly with the two digits,  
press [Cancel] in step H.  
H Press [Sender].  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
I Enter the sender name or sender  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
7
Note  
You can use letters, symbols,  
numbers, or spaces when enter-  
ing the sender name or sender  
number.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
J Press [OK].  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
N Press [Exit].  
Forwarding  
With this feature, messages from  
Specified Senders are printed then  
forwarded to a pre-registered desti-  
nation (Forwarding Address). For ex-  
ample, when you are away on a trip,  
you can have messages automatically  
sent to where you are staying.  
Note  
O Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
function on or off.  
To use the Forwarding function,  
you need to turn on the function  
after specifying the Forwarding  
Address.  
P Press [OK].  
If a sender is specified for both  
Memory Lock and Forwarding  
functions and the Memory Lock is  
turned on, the messages from the  
sender are not forwarded.  
Q Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
7
R Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Messages received with Confiden-  
tial Reception, Memory Lock, Poll-  
ing Reception, or Transfer Request  
are not forwarded.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
Senders as necessary.  
Register the Own Name or Own  
Fax Number of the other party as  
the Specified Sender. If the other  
party has not registered their Own  
Name or Own Fax Number, you  
cannot register them as a Specified  
Sender and forwarding is not pos-  
sible.  
Reference  
See p.239 Deleting Specified  
Sendersfor the deleting proce-  
dure.  
Printing the Specified Sender List  
You can choose to forward mes-  
messages from senders other than  
Specified Senders using the main  
paper tray with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 08 bits 7,6).  
You can check the registered Speci-  
Reference  
See p.241 Printing the Specified  
Sender Listfor the printing proce-  
dure.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Key Operator Settings  
The messages from the Specified  
Senders that you registered or  
messages from the senders other  
than those you registered are for-  
warded to the specified addresses.  
You can choose whether to have  
the Forwarding Address with no  
Specified Senders, if there are any,  
using User Parameters. See p.178  
User Parameters(switch 09 bit  
5).  
See the below table for how to  
count the number of registered  
Specified Senders:  
Forward- Forward- The number of  
ing Ad-  
dress 1  
ing Ad-  
dress 2  
the registered  
Specified  
Senders  
Specified Specified  
Sender A Sender A  
1
1
1
1
1
Total: 5  
Specified  
Sender B  
-
-
Specified  
Sender C  
You can choose whether the ma-  
chine prints out the messages it  
forwards with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parame-  
ters(switch 11 bit 6).  
Specified Specified  
Sender D Sender D  
Specified  
Sender F  
-
You can register up to 30 Forward-  
ing Addresses.  
Total: 4  
Total: 3  
Each Forwarding Address may be  
The total number of the  
programmed Speci-  
fied Senders: 7  
up to 254 digits.  
You can register up to 10 Specified  
Senders to each Forwarding Ad-  
dress. The maximum number of  
Specified Senders is 50, including  
those registered for Multi-copy Re-  
ception, Authorized Reception,  
Specified Tray, Memory Lock or  
TX/RX File Save.  
You can have a forwarding mark  
stamped on each forwarded docu-  
ments.  
7
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
the values of settings according to  
your needs.  
By programming different Speci-  
fied Senders to each Forwarding  
Address, the maximum 50 Speci-  
fied Senders can be registered.  
Forwarding Mark  
You can have a mark stamped on  
documents to indicate that they  
have been forwarded.  
At the forwarding destination this  
can help distinguish between stan-  
dard faxes and faxes that have  
been forwarded.  
The maximum number of Speci-  
fied Senders you can register is 50,  
however, if you program the same  
Specified Senders to different For-  
warding Addresses, up to 300 (30  
Forwarding Addresses × 10 Speci-  
fied Senders per Forwarding Ad-  
dress) of the Specified Senders can  
be programmed.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Set Up  
D Enter the code for "Forwarding"  
with the number keys.  
Turn the Forwarding Mark fea-  
ture on or off with User Param-  
eters. See p.178 User  
Parameters.  
E Press [Receiver].  
Setting up Forwarding  
F Enter the code for "Prog. Receiv-  
er" with the number keys.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
7
G Enter the item number of the For-  
warding Address you wish to reg-  
ister with the number keys.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
Note  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
If you enter the number incor-  
rectly, press [Cancel] and enter  
the correct number.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
You can store up to 30 Forward-  
ing Addresses.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
H Enter the fax number of the For- K Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
warding Address with the num-  
ber keys.  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
Note  
Note  
If you enter the number incor-  
rectly, press the {Clear} key or  
{Stop} key and try again. The  
{Clear} key deletes one charac-  
ter at a time, and the {Stop}  
clears the whole line.  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key to  
clear it and enter the correct  
code. If you enter the code in-  
correctly with the two digits,  
press [Cancel] in step L.  
If the optional ISDN Unit or op-  
tional Extra G3 Interface Unit is  
installed, select the line you  
wish to use before entering the  
fax number. See p.89 Selecting  
the Line.  
L Press [Sender].  
When the NIC FAX Unit (Op-  
tion for Type1) is installed, you  
can also enter an e-mail address.  
7
I Press [Sender] .  
M Enter the sender name or sender  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
Note  
Note  
If you do not register any Speci-  
fied Senders, all incoming faxes  
are forwarded.  
You can use letters, symbols,  
numbers, or spaces when enter-  
ing the sender name or sender  
number.  
J Enter the code for "Program Send-  
er" with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
N Press [OK].  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
O Choose whether to store this item R Press [Exit].  
as a wildcard.  
S Press [OK].  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
P Press [OK].  
T Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
U Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
function on or off.  
7
Q Press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
You can choose to forward only  
messages from Specified Send-  
cept those from Specified  
Senders. Adjust this setting with  
User Parameters. See p.178 Us-  
er Parameters(switch 08 bits  
Note  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step K.  
7,6)  
.
V Press [OK].  
W Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
X Press [Exit] to return to the stand- F Enter the code for "Delete Receiv-  
by mode.  
er" with the number keys.  
Deleting Forwarding Addresses  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
G Enter the item number of the For-  
warding Address you wish to de-  
lete with the number keys.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
H Press [Yes].  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
7
with the number keys.  
I Press [Yes].  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Forwarding"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If you press [No], the display in  
step G appears again.  
E Press [Receiver].  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Set Up  
J Press [PrevMenu].  
K Press [PrevMenu].  
L Press [OK].  
Note  
Deleting Specified Senders (Forwarding)  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
7
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Forwarding"  
with the number keys.  
Select "Off" if you wish to inval-  
idate a setting. If there is no reg-  
istered Forwarding Address,  
the setting automatically chang-  
es to "Off."  
E Press [Receiver].  
M Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
F Enter the code for "Prog. Receiv- J Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
er" with the number keys.  
ified Sender you wish to delete  
with the number keys.  
G Enter the item number of the For-  
warding Address whose Speci- K Press [Yes].  
fied Sender you wish to delete  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key to clear it and enter  
the correct code. If you enter the  
code incorrectly with the two  
digits, press [Cancel] in step H.  
L Press [Yes].  
7
H Press [Sender].  
Note  
If you press [No], the display in  
step J reappears.  
M Press [PrevMenu].  
I Enter the code for "Delete Sender"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
To delete another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step J.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
Note  
N Press [Exit].  
Select "Off" if you wish to inval-  
idate the setting.  
R Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
S Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Printing the Specified Sender List  
(Forwarding)  
O Press [OK].  
You can check which Specified Send-  
ers are registered for a Forwarding  
Address by printing this list.  
Follow the steps below to print this  
list.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
When No Specified Sender Has  
Been Registered  
7
A Press [OK].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
P Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
Q Press [OK].  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
D Enter the code for "Forwarding" J Press the {Start} key.  
with the number keys.  
Note  
E Press [Receiver].  
To stop the list being printed,  
press [Cancel]. The display in  
step I reappears.  
K Press [Exit].  
F Enter the code for "Prog. Receiv-  
er" with the number keys.  
L Press [OK].  
7
G Enter the item number of the For-  
warding Address you wish to  
print out with the number keys.  
M Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
N Press [OK].  
H Press [Sender].  
O Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
P Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
I Enter the code for "Print Sender  
List" with the number keys.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
You can register the Specified  
Senders for the following six func-  
tions: Multi-copy Reception, Au-  
thorized Reception, Specified  
Tray, Forwarding, Memory Lock,  
TX/RX File Save. The maximum  
number of Specified Senders is 50.  
Memory Lock  
You can have messages from Speci-  
fied Senders stored in memory with-  
out printing by using the Memory  
Lock function. A password is re-  
quired when printing the Memory-  
locked messages in order to keep  
them confidential and private. If you  
do not register any Specified Senders,  
all incoming messages are received  
using Memory Lock.  
You can use up to 20 characters  
when registering one item of Spec-  
ified Senders for the G3 communi-  
cation, and 24 characters for the G4  
communication. You can also  
specify wildcards. See p.98 Enter-  
ing Characters, <Basic Features>.  
Preparation  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of the same make as your  
machine, register the sender's  
name registered to their machine.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
ter the fax number.  
Be sure to register the Memory  
Lock ID before using this function.  
See p.199 Registering ID Codes.  
Limitation  
Memory Lock is not activated if  
there is no Memory Lock ID regis-  
tered.  
You can print out Memory-locked  
messages. See p.48 Printing a  
Memory-locked Message.  
Note  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
or sender's fax number registered  
to the fax machines of Specified  
Senders on the Journal. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
the values of settings according to  
your needs.  
If a sender is specified for both  
Memory Lock and Forwarding  
functions and the Memory Lock is  
turned on, the messages from the  
sender are not forwarded.  
You can choose to only lock mes-  
sages from Specified Senders, or  
lock all messages except those  
from Specified Senders with User  
Parameters. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 09 bits 1,0).  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key Operator Settings  
E Press [Sender]  
Setting up Memory Lock  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
Note  
If you do not wish to register a  
Specified Sender, proceed to  
step O.  
If you do not register any Speci-  
fied Senders, all incoming faxes  
are locked in memory.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
F Enter the code for "Program Send-  
er" with the number keys.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
7
G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Memory Lock"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key or the {Stop} key to  
clear it and enter the correct  
code. If you enter the code in-  
correctly with the two digits,  
press [Cancel] in step H.  
Note  
If "Memory Lock" is not shown,  
press [Prev.] or [Next] until it  
is.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Set Up  
H Press [Sender].  
L Press [OK].  
I Enter the sender name or sender M Press [PrevMenu].  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
Note  
Note  
You can use letters, symbols,  
numbers, or spaces when enter-  
ing the sender name or sender  
number.  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
7
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
N Press [Exit].  
J Press [OK].  
K Choose whether to store this item  
as a wildcard.  
O Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
function on or off.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
TX/RX File Save Settings  
You can choose to only lock  
messages from Specified Send-  
ers, or lock all messages except  
those from Specified Senders.  
Adjust this setting with User  
Parameters. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 09 bits 1, 0).  
This function requires the optional Func-  
tion Upgrade Unit and Optional 40MB  
Memory Card.  
Use this function to have messages  
from Specified Senders received us-  
ing the TX/RX File Save function. If  
you do not register any Specified  
Senders, all messages will be received  
using the TX/RX File Save function.  
P Press [OK].  
Q Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
R Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
Note  
by mode.  
the Specified Sender List and keep  
it after registering or editing set-  
tings for this function. See p.217  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
Senders as necessary.  
Register the Own Name or Own  
Fax Number of the other party as  
the Specified Sender. If the other  
party has not registered their Own  
Name or Own Fax Number, you  
cannot register them as a Specified  
Sender.  
Reference  
See p.239 Deleting Specified  
Sendersfor the deleting proce-  
dure.  
7
Printing the Specified Sender List  
You can choose to save only mes-  
sages from Specified Senders, or  
save all messages except those  
from Specified Senders with User  
Parameters. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 09 bits 3,2).  
You can check the registered Speci-  
Reference  
See p.241 Printing the Specified  
Sender Listfor the printing proce-  
dure.  
You can register the Specified  
Senders for the following six func-  
tions: Multi-copy Reception, Au-  
thorized Reception, Specified  
Tray, Forwarding, Memory Lock,  
TX/RX File Save. The maximum  
number of Specified Senders is 50.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Initial Set Up  
You can use up to 20 characters  
when registering one item of Spec-  
ified Senders for the G3 communi-  
cation, and 24 characters for the G4  
communication. You can also spec-  
ify wildcards. See p.98 Entering  
Characters, <Basic Features>.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of the same make as your  
machine, register the sender's  
name registered to their machine.  
If the Specified Sender's fax ma-  
chine is of a different make, regis-  
ter the fax number.  
D Enter the code for "TX/RX File  
Save" with the number keys.  
or sender's fax number registered  
to the fax machines of Specified  
Senders on the Journal. See p.50  
Printing the Journal.  
Note  
If "TX/RX File Save" is not  
shown, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
You can change the current setting  
by following the same procedure  
for making a new setting. Change  
your needs.  
E Press [Sender].  
7
Reference  
p.58 TX/RX File Save”  
Setting up TX/RX File Save  
Note  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
If you do not wish to register a  
Specified Sender, proceed to  
step O.  
If you do not register any Speci-  
fied Senders, all incoming faxes  
are received using TX/RX File  
Save.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
F Enter the code for "Program Send-  
er" with the number keys.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Key Operator Settings  
G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec- K Choose whether to store this item  
ified Sender you wish to register  
with the number keys.  
as a wildcard.  
Note  
If you enter the first digit of the  
code incorrectly, press the  
{Clear} key to clear it and enter  
the correct code. If you enter the  
code incorrectly with the two  
digits, press [Cancel] in step H.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
H Press [Sender].  
7
I Enter the sender name or sender  
number of the other party's fax  
machine you wish to register as a  
Specified Sender.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
To register another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
J Press [OK].  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
N Press [Exit].  
Printing the Specified Sender List  
You can check the registered Speci-  
the registered Specified Senders.  
Reference  
See p.241 Printing the Specified  
Sender Listfor the printing proce-  
dure.  
O Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
function on or off.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
p.214 Multi-copy Reception”  
p.223 Forwarding”  
Note  
p.233 Memory Lock”  
You can choose to save only  
messages from Specified Send-  
ers, or save all messages except  
those from Specified Senders.  
Adjust this setting with User  
Parameters. See p.178 User Pa-  
rameters(switch 09 bits 3, 2).  
p.236 TX/RX File Save Settings”  
7
How to Delete Specified Senders  
Note  
For information about how to de-  
lete Specified Senders for the For-  
warding function, see p.229  
Deleting Specified Senders (For-  
warding).  
P Press [OK].  
Q Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
R Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
The example below describes how to  
delete Specified Senders for the  
Multi-copy Reception feature. The  
procedure for other functions is iden-  
tical except for steps E and L.  
by mode.  
Deleting Specified Senders  
Senders as necessary.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Reference  
See p.239 Deleting Specified  
Sendersfor the deleting proce-  
dure.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. G Enter the 2-digit code of the Spec-  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
ified Sender you wish to delete  
with the number keys.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
Note  
If you enter the code incorrectly,  
press the {Clear} key and try  
again.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
H Press [Yes].  
I Press [Yes].  
Note  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Multi-copy  
Recp." with the number keys.  
7
E Press [Sender].  
If you press [No], the display in  
step G reappears.  
F Enter the code for "Delete Sender"  
J Press [PrevMenu].  
with the number keys.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
Note  
Printing the Specified Sender  
List  
To delete another Specified  
Sender, repeat the procedure  
from step G.  
Follow the steps below to print a sin-  
gle-page list of Specified Senders reg-  
features:  
K Press [Exit].  
L Press [OK].  
Note  
p.214 Multi-copy Reception”  
p.223 Forwarding”  
p.233 Memory Lock”  
p.236 TX/RX File Save Settings”  
How to Print Specified Sender List  
Note  
For information about how to print  
Specified Sender List for the For-  
warding function, see p.231 Print-  
ing the Specified Sender List  
(Forwarding).  
7
Enter "1" if you wish to invali-  
The example below describes how to  
print Specified Senders List for the  
Multi-copy Reception feature. The  
procedure for other functions is iden-  
tical except for steps E and I.  
date the setting.  
M Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
N Press [Exit] to return the standby  
mode.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. G Press the {Start} key.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
Note  
To cancel printing, press [Can-  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
cel]. The display in step F reap-  
pears.  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
H Press [Exit].  
with the number keys.  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
D Enter the code for "Multi-copy  
Recp." with the number keys.  
I Press [OK].  
7
E Press [Sender].  
J Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
K Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
F Enter the code for "Print Sender  
List" with the number keys.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Set Up  
You can check the result of a Back-  
up File Transmission by reading  
the Memory Communication Re-  
sion).  
Backup File Transmission  
Settings  
By registering a destination for ad-  
ministrative use, you can automati-  
cally have backups made of all sent  
faxes.  
Reference  
p.102 Backup File Transmission”  
You can register the following items:  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Administrator's Address (2 desti-  
nations can be registered).  
Store a single fax number, or an e-  
mail address (NIC FAX Unit (Op-  
tion for Type1) required).  
Administrator Name  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys then  
press the {q} key.  
Backup File Transmission applies to  
the following features:  
p.34 Memory Transmission,  
Transfer Request Transmission  
p.28 Transfer Request”  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
7
es”  
C Enter the code for "Initial Set Up"  
with the number keys.  
SUB Code Transmission  
p.13 SUB Code Transmission  
with the Mode Key”  
E-mail Transmission (NIC FAX  
Unit (Option for Type1) required)  
The "Initial Set Up" menu appears.  
Limitation  
D Enter the code for "Backup File  
If memory runs out due to keeping  
too many standby messages or  
failed messages, transmission can-  
not take place.  
TX" with the number keys.  
Note  
You cannot register the adminis-  
trator's address to a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial.  
Note  
If "Backup File TX" is not  
shown, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
Immediate Transmission is not  
available when Backup File Trans-  
mission is turned on.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter a name for the adminis-  
E Press 0 or 1 key to turn this  
trator address.  
function on or off.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
F Press [Receiv.1] or [Receiv.2].  
C Press [OK].  
H Press [OK].  
G Enter the fax number of the back-  
up destination (Administrator  
Address).  
7
I Press [OK].  
Note  
If the NIC FAX Unit (Option for  
Type1) is installed, you can en-  
ter an e-mail address by press-  
ing the User Function key ({F1}  
to {F10}) which the Internet Fax  
function is assigned to. See NIC  
FAX Unit manual.  
J Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
K Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
Registering/Editing the  
administrator name  
by mode.  
A Press [Name].  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box Settings  
Box Settings  
See the following pages for how to set  
up and delete Personal Boxes, Infor-  
mation Boxes and Transfer Boxes.  
This feature provides the following  
functions:  
Note  
SUB or SEP codes registered in  
Personal Boxes, Information Boxes  
or Transfer Boxes cannot be identi-  
cal.  
Registering or editing Personal  
Boxes  
If memory runs out, you may not  
be able to receive messages or reg-  
ister settings. The available memo-  
ry capacity depends on installed  
options.  
See p.247 Registering/Editing  
Personal Boxes.  
The combined maximum number  
of Personal Boxes, Information  
Boxes, and Transfer Boxes that you  
can store is 150 (400 when the op-  
tional Function Upgrade Unit is in-  
stalled).  
Deleting Personal Boxes  
Deleting Personal Boxes  
See p.250 Deleting Personal Box-  
es.  
es  
You can deliver documents in an e-  
mail format to destinations such as  
End Receivers by making Box set-  
tings with specified Sub-addresses  
for ISDN. (Optional ISDN Unit  
Type1) required)  
Registering or editing Information  
Boxes  
See p.251 Registering/Editing In-  
7
Deleting Information Boxes  
Deleting Information Boxes  
See p.253 Deleting Information  
Boxes.  
Reference  
p.67 Box File Manager Functions”  
Registering/Editing Transfer Boxes  
Registering or editing Transfer  
Boxes  
-What is the SUB/SEP Code?  
The SUB code or SEP code has a simi-  
lar function to a password. It is a com-  
bination of numbers (0 to 9), symbols  
("q" and "p") and spaces. You can  
use up to 20 characters when register-  
ing a SUB/SEP code.  
See p.255 Registering/Editing  
Transfer Boxes.  
Deleting Transfer Boxes  
Deleting Transfer Boxes  
See p.258 Deleting Transfer Box-  
es.  
SUB/SEP codes are used when mak-  
ing Box settings so that the users of  
Boxes may send messages to a Box or  
retrieve one from a Box by specifying  
the SUB/SEP code for the Box.  
Print this list to view the contents  
of Personal Boxes, Information  
Boxes, and Transfer Boxes. See  
p.259 Printing the Box List.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
Note  
Personal Boxes  
To be able to receive messages into  
a Personal Box, you must inform  
the sender of the SUB code regis-  
that SUB code. See p.78 SUB/SID  
(SUB Code Transmission)and  
p.13 SUB Code Transmission  
with the Mode Key.  
This feature lets you set up the ma-  
chine so that incoming messages ad-  
dressed to certain users are stored in  
memory instead of being printed out  
immediately. Each user must be as-  
signed a SUB Code (User Code) that  
has been designated as a Personal Box  
beforehand. When the other party  
sends their message, they specify the  
SUB code of the user they are sending  
to. When the message is received, it is  
stored in the Personal Box with the  
matching SUB Code. In order to print  
a message received into a Personal  
Box, you must enter the SUB code as-  
signed to that Personal Box. This en-  
ables several individuals or  
departments to share a single fax ma-  
chine yet be able to differentiate be-  
tween messages. Furthermore, if you  
specify a receiver for the Personal  
Box, instead of being stored in memo-  
ry, incoming messages with this SUB  
code appended are forwarded direct-  
ly to the destination you specify.  
When messages have been re-  
Confidential Reception/Memory  
Lock indicator lights and the Con-  
fidential File Report is printed. See  
p.47 Confidential File Report.  
receiver, incoming messages are  
transferred to that receiver. If a re-  
ceiver is not assigned, see p.67  
Printing Personal Box Messages”  
for how to print these messages  
out.  
7
This machine  
Personal Box  
Sender  
Receiver  
A
SUB Code : 1111  
Receiver : A  
SUB:1111  
SUB Code : 2222  
Receiver : B  
SUB Code : 3333  
Receiver : -  
Print  
GFSINB0N  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Box Settings  
User Code Transmission  
See p.10 User Code Transmis-  
Registering/Editing Personal  
Boxes  
sion.  
Printing the Journal  
This section describes how to register  
Personal Boxes.  
TX/RX File Save  
You can store the following items:  
See p.59 Searching Memory for  
Sent Faxesand p.62 Searching  
Memory for Received Faxes.  
SUB Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
The Fax Header is not printed on  
delivered messages. See p.56 Pro-  
gramming Own Name / Fax  
Header, <Basic Features>.  
Name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long.  
If a message cannot be delivered, a  
Communication Failure Report is  
printed and the message is saved  
as a Confidential Reception docu-  
ment.  
Password (optional)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space). By programming  
the password, no one without the  
password can print out the re-  
ceived messages in the Personal  
Box. It is recommended to pro-  
gram the password if you receive  
confidential messages.  
You can specify a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial containing an e-mail  
address as the receiver when the  
NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1)  
is installed.  
7
You can edit boxes in the same  
way as registering them. However,  
to change the SUB Code itself, you  
SUB Code.  
Receiver (optional)  
You can register one delivery des-  
tination for each Personal Box.  
Specify the Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial that the delivery desti-  
nation is stored in.  
Reference  
p.246 Personal Boxes”  
Quick Dial key (optional)  
If you assign this SUB Code to a  
Quick Dial key, press this key to  
enter the associated User Code  
(Personal Box SUB Code) with a  
single key press.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
When using the following func-  
tions, you can use SUB codes regis-  
tered in Personal Boxes in place of  
User Codes.  
Restricted Access  
See p.25 Restricted Access,  
<Basic Features>.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
B Enter the code for "Key Op. G Press [Name].  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
H Enter the name of the box.  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
To change a previously stored  
name, press the {Clear} key or  
the {Stop} key, then enter a new  
one.  
D Enter the code for "Personal Box"  
with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
7
E Enter the SUB Code you wish to  
register as a Personal Box.  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [Others].  
Note  
If you enter the code incorrectly,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key and try again.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
Registering a Password (SID)  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
A Enter the code for "Program  
Password" with the number  
keys.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box Settings  
B Enter the password you wish to  
B Press the Quick Dial key you  
register.  
wish to assign the box to.  
Note  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the  
password, press the {Clear}  
key or the {Stop} key, then  
try again.  
To check the current contents  
of Quick Dial keys, press [Sta-  
tus].  
C Press [OK].  
C Press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
Registering a Receiver  
A Enter the code for "Program  
Receiver" with the number  
keys.  
L Press [OK].  
7
B Specify the Quick Dial key or  
Speed Dial in which the deliv-  
ery destination is stored.  
C Press [OK].  
M Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
Assigning a Quick Dial Key  
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
A Enter the code for "Assign  
by mode.  
Key" with the number keys.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
E Enter the SUB Code of the Person-  
Deleting Personal Boxes  
al Box you wish to delete.  
This section describes how to delete  
Personal Boxes.  
Limitation  
If the specified SUB Code is not  
registered as a Personal Box, or the  
messages of the box are registered,  
you cannot delete it.  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key, then try again.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G Press [Yes].  
7
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
Note  
with the number keys.  
If you press [No], the box is not  
deleted and the display in step  
E reappears.  
H Press [Yes].  
D Enter the code for "Del. Personal  
Box" with the number keys.  
Note  
If you press [No], the box is not  
deleted and the display in step  
E reappears.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
You can print and check the con-  
tents of Information Boxes. See  
p.70 Printing Information Box  
Messages.  
I Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
Registering/Editing  
Information Boxes  
Information Boxes  
Use the Information Box feature to set  
up the machine as a fax information  
service or document server. By scan-  
ning documents into Information Box-  
es, other parties can receive these  
messages whenever they request them.  
This section describes how to set up  
an Information Box.  
You can store the following items:  
SEP Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
To check on the contents of Informa-  
tion Boxes, use the Print Information  
File function .  
This machine  
Password (optional)  
Information Box  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space). By programming  
Boxes, p.70 Printing Information  
Box Messagesand p.80  
SEP/PWD (SEP Code Polling  
in SEP Code Polling Reception, the  
other party does not have to enter  
the password. See p.16 SEP Code  
Polling Reception.  
Register  
Documents  
Receiver  
SEP:2222  
SEP Code : 4444  
SEP Code : 5555  
SEP Code : 6666  
Transmission  
Request  
Print  
GFKEIB0N  
Note  
Register documents for this feature  
using the Box File Manager func-  
tion. See p.69 Storing Messages in  
Information Boxes.  
For the other party to be able to re-  
trieve a message registered in an  
Information Box, you need to in-  
form them of the SEP code as-  
signed to that Information Box.  
Name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long.  
When a SEP Code Polling Recep-  
tion request is made by another  
party, the SEP code they specify is  
compared with the SEP code regis-  
sent to the other party automatical-  
ly. See p.16 SEP Code Polling Re-  
ceptionand p.80 SEP/PWD  
(SEP Code Polling Transmission).  
Note  
You can edit boxes in the same  
way as registering them. However,  
to change the SEP Code itself, you  
SEP Code.  
Reference  
p.251 Information Boxes”  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Key Operator Settings  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
G Press [Name].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
H Enter the name of the box.  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
with the number keys.  
Note  
7
To change a previously stored  
name, press the {Clear} key or  
the {Stop} key, then enter a new  
one.  
D Enter the code for "Prog. Info.  
Box" with the number keys.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
<Basic Features>  
E Enter the SEP code you wish to  
register as an Information Box.  
I Press [OK].  
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key, then try again.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box Settings  
J Press [Password].  
Deleting Information Boxes  
This section describes how to delete  
Information Boxes.  
Limitation  
If the specified SEP Code is not  
registered as an Information Box  
or the messages of the box are reg-  
istered, you cannot delete it.  
Note  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
If you do not wish to register a  
password, proceed to step M.  
K Enter the password you wish to  
register.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
Note  
If you enter the password incor-  
rectly, press the {Clear} key or  
the {Stop} key, then try again.  
7
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
L Press [OK].  
M Press [OK].  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Del. Info. Box"  
with the number keys.  
N Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
O Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
E Enter the SEP Code of the Infor- J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
mation box you wish to delete.  
by mode.  
Transfer Boxes  
This feature turns your machine into  
a fax relay station. Documents sent  
with a SUB Code that matches the  
SUB Code registered as a Transfer  
Box are received then relayed to the  
registered receiver.  
Note  
If you enter the code incorrectly,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key, then try again.  
Since documents can be sent to multi-  
ple destinations in a single transfer re-  
quest, you can economize on  
communication costs when sending  
to remote destinations.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
End Receiver  
This Machine iTransfer Station j  
A
Transfer Box  
G Press [Yes].  
H Press [Yes].  
Note  
Requesting party  
SUB Code : 7777  
SUB:7777  
End Receiver : A,B,C  
End Receiver  
B
Transfer  
Request  
SUB Code : 8888  
End Receiver : D,E,F  
SUB Code : 9999  
End Receiver : G,H,I  
End Receiver  
C
7
Print  
GFCYUB0N  
Note  
Inform the requesting party of the  
SUB code assigned to the Transfer  
Box. When they wish to have a  
message transferred by your ma-  
chine, ask them to send the mes-  
sage using SUB Code Transmission  
ter it for the SID code. See p.78  
SUB/SID (SUB Code Transmis-  
sion)and p.13 SUB Code Trans-  
mission with the Mode Key.  
If you press [No], the box is not  
deleted and the display in step  
E reappears.  
I Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Box Settings  
By default, the machine prints out  
received messages and the Trans-  
fer Result Report that it transfers  
after the transfer has finished. If  
you wish to turn this feature off,  
please contact your service repre-  
sentative.  
Registering/Editing Transfer  
Boxes  
This section describes how to set up a  
Transfer Box for forwarding incom-  
ing SUB transfer request messages  
onto end receivers.  
You can have received messages  
sent using Economy Transmission.  
Please contact your service repre-  
sentative for details.  
You can store the following items:  
SUB Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
When the registered receiver is a  
Multi-step Transfer Group Dial,  
Multi-step Transfer takes place.  
See p.115 Multi-step Transfer”  
and p.87 Groups, <Basic Fea-  
tures>.  
Name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long.  
Password (optional)  
You can specify a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial containing an e-mail  
address as the receiver when the  
NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1)  
is installed.  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, "q", "p"  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space). By programming  
the password, no one without the  
password can access the Transfer  
Box. It is recommended to pro-  
gram the password if you wish to  
restrict the access to the Transfer  
Box.  
You can edit boxes in the same  
way as registering them. However,  
to change the SUB Code itself, you  
SUB Code.  
7
End Receiver (required)  
Reference  
p.254 Transfer Boxes”  
You can store 5 end receivers (des-  
tinations to which messages will  
be forwarded) for each box. Speci- A Press the {User Tools} key.  
fy end receivers with Quick Dial  
keys, Speed Dials, or Groups as-  
signed to Quick Dial keys that  
have been registered beforehand.  
Limitation  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
After messages are transferred, a  
Transfer Result Report is not sent  
back to the sender.  
Note  
After messages are transferred  
they are deleted.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings" H Enter the name for the Transfer  
with the number keys.  
Box.  
Note  
D Enter the code for "Prog. Transf.  
Box" with the number keys.  
To change a previously stored  
name, press the {Clear} key or  
the {Stop} key, then enter a new  
one.  
Reference  
p.98 Entering Characters,  
Note  
<Basic Features>  
If "Prog. Transf. Box" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
I Press [OK].  
J Press [Others].  
E Enter the SUB code you wish to  
register as a Transfer Box.  
7
Note  
If you incorrectly enter the code,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key, then try again.  
Registering a Password (SID)  
F Press [OK].  
A Enter the code for "Program  
Password" with the number  
keys.  
Note  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
G Press [Name].  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Box Settings  
B Enter the password you wish to  
K Press [Exit].  
register.  
Note  
If you enter the password in-  
correctly, press the {Clear}  
key or the {Stop} key and try  
again.  
L Press [OK].  
C Press [OK].  
Registering End Receivers  
A Enter the code for "Prog. Re-  
ceiver" with the number keys.  
M Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
N Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
B Enter the number of the end re-  
ceiver you wish to register with  
the number keys.  
by mode.  
7
Note  
You can register up to 5 end  
receivers.  
C Specify the Quick Dial key,  
Speed Dial or Group in which  
the end receiver is stored.  
D Press [OK].  
E Press [PrevMenu].  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Operator Settings  
E Enter the SUB code of the Trans-  
Deleting Transfer Boxes  
fer Box you wish to delete.  
This section describes how to delete  
Transfer Boxes.  
Limitation  
If the specified SUB Code is not  
registered as a Transfer Box, or the  
messages of the box are registered  
you cannot delete it.  
Note  
If you enter the code incorrectly,  
press the {Clear} key or the  
{Stop} key and try again.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
F Press [OK].  
Note  
If a password is already regis-  
tered, enter the password, then  
press [OK].  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G Press [Yes].  
H Press [Yes].  
Note  
7
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Del. Transfer  
Box" with the number keys.  
If you press [No], the box is not  
deleted and the display in step  
E reappears.  
Note  
If "Del. Transfer Box" is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
I Press [PrevMenu] three times.  
J Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Box Settings  
E Press the {Start} key.  
Printing the Box List  
The list is printed.  
Follow the procedure below to print a  
list showing the currently registered  
Personal Boxes, Information Boxes  
and Transfer Boxes.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
Note  
To cancel printing, press [Can-  
cel]. The display in step D will  
reappear.  
F Press [PrevMenu] twice.  
B Enter the code for "Key Op.  
Tools" with the number keys.  
Then press the {q} key.  
G Press [Exit] to return to the stand-  
by mode.  
The "Key Op. Tools" main menu  
appears.  
7
C Enter the code for "Box Settings"  
with the number keys.  
D Enter the code for "Print Box List "  
with the number keys.  
Note  
If "Print Box List " is not dis-  
played, press [Prev.] or [Next]  
until it is.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Key Operator Settings  
7
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Solving Operation Problems  
Clearing a Paper Jam in the Optional  
Paper Supply Units  
B Remove any jammed paper slow-  
Clearing a Paper Jam in the  
Optional Paper Tray Unit  
ly.  
The Fusing Unit and its surrounding  
areas may be very hot. Do not touch  
areas other than those indicated in  
this manual when clearing a paper  
jam. Doing so may result in burns.  
Important  
Do not attempt to pull out jammed  
paper with excessive force. Doing  
so may rip the paper or cause the  
C Push the side cover closed until  
machine to malfunction.  
you hear it click into place.  
Note  
D Pull out the optional Paper Tray  
For instructions on clearing paper  
jams in the main paper tray, see  
p.108 Clearing Original Jams,  
<Basic Features>.  
Unit in the direction of the arrow.  
A Open the side cover of the option-  
al Paper Tray Unit in the direction  
of the arrow.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Solving Operation Problems  
E Remove any jammed paper slow- B Remove any remaining paper.  
ly.  
C Hold both ends of the Bypass  
Tray Unit firmly, and lift it up  
slightly to remove it.  
F Push in the optional Paper Tray  
Unit until it clicks into place.  
Clearing a Paper Jam in the  
Optional Bypass Tray Unit  
Important  
Do not attempt to pull out the  
jammed paper with excessive  
force. Doing so may rip the paper  
or cause the machine to malfunc-  
tion.  
8
D Remove any jammed paper slow-  
A Shift the paper stop lever toward  
ly.  
the machine.  
Note  
If you find any paper jammed in  
the Fusing Unit area, remove it  
following the procedure de-  
scribed under p.110 Clearing  
Paper Jams in the Fusing Unit,  
<Basic Features>.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing a Paper Jam in the Optional Paper Supply Units  
E Hold the Bypass Tray Unit at both G Shift the paper stop lever back to  
ends, and reattach it to the ma-  
chine.  
its original position.  
Note  
Make sure that the unit is prop-  
erly attached to the machine. It  
should not be tilted, nor should  
there be any gap between the  
unit and machine.  
8
F Even the edges of a stack of paper  
and load it into the unit with the  
printable surface facing down.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Operation Problems  
Reading Reports  
Error Report  
Power Failure Report  
The error report is printed after each  
unsuccessful communication (both  
transmission and reception). The  
communication failure may normally  
be caused either by your machine, or  
the fax machine on the other end.  
Noise on the telephone line may also  
be one of the causes. If the error re-  
port is printed after sending a fax  
message, try sending it again. If the  
report is printed after a fax message  
came in, contact the sender and re-  
quest them to send it again.  
Turning the power off does not erase  
the data stored into the machine such  
as fax numbers programmed in a  
Quick Dial key. However, if the ma-  
chine is left turned off for 12 hours or  
longer, the data stored in the ma-  
chine's memory with functions such  
as Memory Transmission/Reception,  
Substitute Reception or Auto Docu-  
ment, or data of other standby docu-  
ments is deleted. Once the data stored  
in memory is deleted, the machine  
automatically prints out the power  
failure report when you turn it on  
again, so that you may check the de-  
leted data.  
Note  
If the machine continues to print  
error reports after retrials, contact  
your service representative.  
If the deleted fax message was for  
Memory Transmission, check the re-  
ceiver's information and send it. If it  
was stored in Memory Reception or  
Substitute Reception functions, con-  
tact the sender and request them to  
send it again. If it was an Auto Docu-  
ment, register the document once  
more.  
Normally, when specifying the  
destination with a Quick Dial key  
or Speed Dial, "ADDRESS" on this  
report shows Own Name or Own  
Fax Number registered in the re-  
ceiver's machine. However, you  
can change the setting with User  
number of the destination stored  
in the Quick Dial key or Speed Dial  
in your machine is printed instead.  
See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 04 bit 4).  
8
Important  
Make sure that the available mem-  
ory level which appears on the dis-  
play is 100% before turning the  
power off.  
Reference  
p.265 Error Codes”  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Error Codes  
Error Codes  
Fax machines use a telephone line. The same types of problems you experience  
while making phone calls (such as noisy lines, crosstalk, disconnection during  
conversation, and weak signals) also occur with faxing. Telephone callers can  
deal with the problems themselves (for example, by speaking a bit louder), but  
fax machines cannot. Therefore some errors and line failures are to be expected.  
When an error occurs, an error report is printed. This report includes an error  
code. The following table lists common error codes and a few of the possible  
causes. If any of these or any other error codes persistently appear and the ma-  
chine does not work properly, contact your service representative.  
Note  
When an error occurs, it does not necessarily mean that you are doing any-  
thing wrong or that your machine needs service. Only if the problem persists  
should you call your service representative.  
Code  
0-01  
0-04  
0-05  
0-06  
0-07  
Possible Cause  
Printer empty or jammed at the other end  
Faulty machine at the other end Poor line condition  
Poor line condition  
Incompatible or faulty terminal at the other end Poor line condition  
The facsimile machine that you were sending to was disconnected during the call,  
either due to noisy phone lines, a paper jam or because it ran out of paper. Resend  
the page.  
0-08  
The machine at the other end received the page that you sent but it had errors on  
the page. You may wish to resend the page in question. The other party's memory  
could also be full. Contact the other party and ask them to make room in their  
memory for your message.  
8
0-14  
0-15  
Same as for code 0-06  
The other party does not have the confidential or transfer function. The other par-  
ty's memory may be full.  
0-16  
0-20  
0-21  
0-22  
Same as for code 0-04  
Poor line condition  
Same as for code 0-04  
You have just received a fax message, but there were problems because of poor line  
condition. Ask the other party to resend.  
0-23  
Same as for code 0-22  
0-24  
0-25  
The memory may be full, and there may be a problem with your printer, such as a  
jam or lack of paper or toner. Wait for some space to appear in the memory, and  
then solve the problem with your printer. If the memory was not full, substitute  
reception may have been disabled; switch substitute reception on with User Pa-  
rameters.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Solving Operation Problems  
Code  
0-80~88  
1-00  
Possible Cause  
Poor line condition Incompatible or faulty terminal at the other end  
Document jam Improperly inserted document  
1-01  
Document length exceeded the maximum limit Same as for code 1-00  
Possible fault in your machine  
2-xx  
3-xx  
There is a problem with the ISDN network. Check the ISDN line connection.  
Faulty terminal at the other end.  
4-10  
ID codes did not match. Co-ordinate ID codes with the other party.  
5-20  
5-21  
5-22  
5-23  
Insufficient memory to receive the message. When the pages in memory have been  
printed, ask the other party to resend.  
5-25  
5-30  
Your machine has a problem.  
6-00  
6-01  
6-02  
6-04  
Poor line condition or a problem with your machine  
6-05  
Poor line condition, a problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem  
with your machine  
6-06  
6-08  
A problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem with your machine  
A problem with the machine at the other end  
6-09  
6-10  
A problem with the machine at the other end, or a problem with your machine  
8
9-07  
9-08  
9-09  
9-10  
Copy jam at the tray entrance (first, or top, paper feed station)  
Copy jam inside the machine (first, or top, paper feed station)  
Copy jam at the feed-out area  
Toner end. Replace the toner cartridge.  
9-17  
9-20  
9-22  
9-23  
9-24  
There is a problem with your printer.  
9-3x  
There is a problem with the hard disk option.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Maintaining Your Machine  
Loading Paper into the Optional Paper  
Tray Unit  
The following procedure describes  
how to load paper in the optional Pa-  
Make sure that the size of paper  
per Tray Unit.  
Important  
loaded in the unit matches the  
size indicated by the size mark.  
If not, the size of the loaded pa-  
per is not recognized correctly  
and the printed images may be  
incomplete or paper jams may  
occur.  
A Pull out the optional Paper Tray  
Unit.  
C Fan a stack of paper and even the  
edges, then load it in the Paper  
Tray Unit with the printable sur-  
face facing down. Make sure that  
the top of the paper is under the  
notches in the corner of the unit.  
B Adjust the size mark to the size of  
the paper that you are loading.  
Turn the dial to adjust it, so that  
the desired paper size appears.  
Important  
Make sure not to load paper  
over the limit mark.  
Note  
You can load up to 500 sheets of  
copy paper.  
D Replace the Paper Tray Unit care-  
fully.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Maintaining Your Machine  
Loading Paper into the Optional Bypass  
Tray Unit  
Note  
C Shift the paper hold lever back to  
its original position.  
You can load paper in the optional  
Bypass Tray Unit up to approxi-  
mately 100 sheets (81/2"×11" or  
smaller size), 10 sheet (larger than  
81/2"×11" size) or 40 postcards (L  
only).  
A Shift the paper hold lever toward  
the machine.  
B Even the edges of a stack of paper  
and load it into the unit with the  
printable surface facing down.  
9
Important  
Make sure not to load paper  
over the limit mark.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the Paper Size  
Changing the Paper Size  
This section describes how to change  
A Pull out the main paper tray until  
the paper size in the main paper tray,  
optional Paper Tray Unit and option-  
al Bypass Tray Unit to a desired paper  
size.  
it comes to a complete stop.  
Make sure to keep the paper tray  
horizontal when pulling it out.  
Do not use paper with staples or con-  
ductive paper such as aluminum foil  
or paper that contains carbon. Doing  
so may cause fire.  
Be careful not to injure your fingers  
when changing copy paper.  
Changing the Paper Size in the  
Main Paper Tray  
B Remove any remaining paper.  
The following example explains how  
to switch to A4 size paper. To switch  
to other paper sizes, follow the same  
steps but move the end plate and side  
rails to the appropriate size mark on  
the tray.  
Important  
Make sure that copying or printing  
of received fax messages is not in  
progress.  
9
Note  
C Adjust the size mark to the size of  
You can load up to 500 sheets of  
the paper that you are loading.  
copy paper in the main paper tray.  
Turn the dial to adjust it, so that  
the desired paper size appears.  
For information on the size and  
orientation of copy paper that you  
can load in the paper tray, see  
p.298 Paper”  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining Your Machine  
Important  
E Make sure that the side rail is set  
correctly to the desired paper size  
indicated at the bottom of the pa-  
per tray.  
Make sure that the size of paper  
loaded in the unit matches the  
size indicated by the size mark.  
If not, the size of the loaded pa-  
per is not recognized and print-  
ed images may be incomplete or  
paper jams may occur.  
D Adjust the side rail nearest to you  
to the size of the paper that you  
are loading while squeezing the  
green tray extension release tab.  
F Remove the end plate by squeez-  
ing in at both sides and lifting it  
up.  
To Change to Legal or Letter Size  
A First set the side rail to a size  
smaller than Legal (81/2×14 in.)  
or Letter (81/2×11 in.) to peel off  
the sticker at the bottom as  
shown below, then adjust the  
side rail to the desired paper  
size.  
G Insert the end plate into the slot  
9
for the desired paper size.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Paper Size  
Important  
Changing the Paper Size in the  
Optional Paper Tray Unit  
Make sure that the end plate is  
properly inserted so that the  
tabs at the lower end of the plate  
are securely fastened to the bot-  
tom plate of the tray.  
Important  
Make sure that copying or printing  
of received fax messages is not in  
progress.  
H Fan a stack of paper and even the  
edges, then load it in the main pa-  
per tray with the printable surface  
facing down. Make sure that the  
top of the paper is under the  
notches in the corner of the tray.  
Note  
You can load up to 500 sheets of  
copy paper in the optional Paper  
For information on the size and  
orientation of copy paper that you  
can load in the unit, see p.298 Pa-  
per.  
A Pull out the Paper Tray Unit until  
it comes to a complete stop.  
Make sure to keep the unit hori-  
zontal when pulling it out.  
Important  
Make sure not to load paper  
over the limit mark.  
I Replace the main paper tray care-  
fully.  
9
B Remove any remaining paper.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining Your Machine  
C Adjust the size mark to the size of  
To Change to Legal or Letter Size  
the paper that you are loading.  
A First set the side rail to a size  
smaller than Legal (81/2×14 in.) or  
Letter (81/2×11 in.) to peel off the  
sticker at the bottom as shown  
below, then adjust the side rail to  
the desired paper size.  
Important  
Make sure that the size of paper  
loaded in the unit matches the  
size indicated by the size mark.  
If not, the size of the loaded pa-  
per is not recognized and print-  
ed images may be incomplete or  
paper jams may occur.  
E Make sure that the side rail is set  
correctly to the desired paper size  
indicated at the bottom of the  
unit.  
D Adjust the side rail that is nearer  
to you to the size of the paper that  
you are loading while squeezing  
in the green tray extension release  
tab.  
9
F
Remove the end plate by squeezing  
in at both sides and lifting it up.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Paper Size  
G Insert the end plate into the slot  
Changing the Paper Size in the  
Optional Bypass Tray Unit  
for the desired paper size.  
Important  
Make sure that copying or printing  
of received fax messages is not in  
progress.  
Note  
You can load up to approximately  
100 sheets (81/2"×11" or smaller  
size), 10 sheets (larger than  
81/2"×11" size) or 40 postcards (L  
only) in the optional Bypass Tray  
Unit.  
Important  
Make sure that the end plate is  
properly inserted so that the  
tabs at the lower end of the plate  
are securely fastened to the bot-  
tom plate of the unit.  
For information on the size and  
orientation of copy paper that you  
can load in the unit, see p.298 Pa-  
per.  
H Fan a stack of paper and even the  
edges, then load it in the unit with  
the printable surface facing  
down. Make sure that the top of  
the paper is under the notches in  
the corner of the unit.  
A Shift the paper hold lever toward  
the machine.  
9
B Remove any remaining paper.  
Important  
Make sure not to load paper  
over the limit mark.  
I Replace the optional Paper Tray  
Unit carefully.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining Your Machine  
C Adjust the paper size mark to the E Even the edges of a stack of paper  
size of the paper that you are  
loading.  
and load it into the unit with the  
printable surface facing down.  
Note  
Important  
To load custom size paper, set  
the paper size to the "p" mark.  
Make sure not to load paper  
over the limit mark.  
You can use custom size paper  
only for making copies or PC  
Printing (option).  
F Shift the paper hold lever back to  
its original position.  
D Adjust the paper guide to the size  
of the paper that you are loading.  
9
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Cleaning  
You may not have satisfactory copy-  
ing or printing results if the parts of  
the machine are not clean. Clean your  
machine regularly so that you may al-  
ways use it in the best condition.  
B Remove the feed unit by first  
pushing it in the direction of the  
arrow and then lifting up the end  
of the unit that is nearest to you.  
The parts that needs to be cleaned  
regularly are listed below.  
Document transport mechanism  
Copy paper transport mechanism  
of the optional Paper Tray Unit  
Important  
Do not use thinner, benzine, alco-  
hol or detergent for cleaning. Do-  
ing so may cause the plastic parts  
to change shape or color.  
Note  
You may remove the feed unit  
only when you are cleaning it or  
replacing it with a new one.  
Cleaning the Document  
Transport Mechanism  
C Wipe the entire surface of the sep-  
aration roller as well as the rollers  
of the feed unit while rotating  
them.  
A Open the ADF cover.  
Use a soft cloth that has been  
dampened with water and wrung  
out.  
9
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintaining Your Machine  
D Replace the feed unit to its origi- G Wipe the exposure glass, the  
nal position by first pushing the  
far end, and then pushing the  
near end into their places.  
white strip under the exposure  
glass cover, and the six rollers.  
Use a dry, soft cloth. If it is very  
dirty, wipe with a soft cloth that  
has been dampened with water  
and wrung out, then wipe the sur-  
face with a dry cloth.  
E Close the ADF cover, making sure  
that it clicks firmly into place.  
F While pushing the release lever,  
open the ADF unit.  
1. White strip  
2. Roller  
3. Exposure glass  
H Close the ADF unit, making sure  
that it clicks firmly into place.  
9
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
C Close the side cover of the main  
paper tray, making sure that it  
locks firmly into place.  
Cleaning the Copy Paper  
Transport Mechanism  
Optional Paper Tray Unit  
Main Paper Tray  
A Open the side cover of the Paper  
A Open the side cover of the main  
Tray Unit.  
paper tray.  
B Wipe the five rollers with a soft  
cloth that has been dampened  
with water and wrung out.  
Note  
You cannot open the paper tray  
side cover when the optional  
Remove the optional Bypass  
Tray Unit first, and then open  
the paper tray side cover. See  
p.278 Optional Bypass Tray  
Unit.  
9
B Wipe the two rollers with a soft  
cloth that has been dampened  
with water and wrung out.  
1. Roller  
C Close the unit's side cover mak-  
ing sure it locks firmly into place.  
1. Roller  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Maintaining Your Machine  
D Wipe the entire surface of the roll-  
Optional Bypass Tray Unit  
er while rotating it.  
A Shift the paper stop lever toward  
the machine.  
1. Roller  
E Hold the Bypass Tray Unit at both  
ends, and reattach it to the ma-  
chine.  
B Remove any remaining paper.  
C Hold both ends of the Bypass  
Tray Unit firmly, and lift it up  
slightly to remove it.  
9
Note  
Make sure that the unit is prop-  
erly attached to the machine. It  
should not be tilted, nor should  
there be a gap between the unit  
and machine.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cleaning  
F Even the edges of a stack of paper  
and load it into the unit with the  
printable surface facing down.  
Cleaning the Registration  
Roller  
Some parts of the machine may be  
very hot. Do not touch the areas la-  
belled "Caution! Hot surface." Doing  
so may result in a burn.  
Limitation  
Cleaning the registration roller  
while the power is turned on may  
result in a burn. Make sure to turn  
the power off before cleaning the  
registration roller.  
G Shift the paper stop lever back to  
A Open the main side cover.  
its original position.  
B
While rotating the rubber part of  
the registration roller, wipe it with  
a soft cloth that has been damp-  
ened with water and wrung out.  
9
1. Registration roller  
2. RCaution / Hot surface  
C Close the main side cover, mak-  
ing sure it locks firmly into place.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintaining Your Machine  
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge  
When the stamp mark begins to fade,  
Note  
it is time to replace the stamp car-  
Remove the stamp cartridge  
tridge.  
with pincers, or carefully ease  
out the end of the stamp head  
with your fingernails.  
Note  
Only use stamp cartridges de-  
signed specifically for this ma-  
chine.  
One stamp cartridge can stamp ap-  
proximately 3,000 times.  
A Open the ADF unit while push-  
ing the release lever.  
C Insert the new stamp cartridge.  
B Pull out the old stamp cartridge.  
9
D Close the ADF unit, making sure  
that it clicks firmly into place.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10. Appendix  
Installation, Move and Disposal of the  
Machine  
This section provides you with information about installation, move and dispos-  
al of this machine.  
Important  
Installation of this machine must be performed by an authorized dealer or  
service representative. Never attempt to install the machine by yourself.  
Machine Environment  
If the machine is installed in an inappropriate location, you may not be able to  
make copies or send or receive fax messages properly. Doing so may also cause  
the machine to malfunction.  
R WARNING:  
Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-  
tension cord.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,  
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:  
You spill something into the machine.  
You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
R CAUTION:  
Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.  
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside  
the machine.  
Note  
Install the machine on a level surface. Make sure that the difference in height  
is less than 2mm (0.08 in.) between the four corners of the machine.  
Install the machine on a stable surface. If you need to place it on a table, pre-  
pare a sturdy table larger than the size of the machine exclusively for the ma-  
chine.  
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, be sure to locate this machine in a large  
well ventilated room that has an air turnover of more than 30m3/hr/person.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
Use this machine in an environment that satisfies the conditions described in the di-  
agram below.  
Temperature  
89.6 / 32  
Acceptable environment  
80.6 / 27  
77 / 25  
Recommend  
environment  
59 / 15  
50 / 10  
15  
30  
54  
70  
80 Humidity(%)  
Note  
When the machine is subject to a sudden and drastic change in tempera-  
ture or humidity, condensation in the machine may affect the printing  
quality of the copied images or received messages. If this should occur,  
wait momentarily, and copy the images again, or ask the sender of the  
message to resend.  
Recommended Environment  
Temperature 15 25°C (59 77°F)  
Humidity 30 70% RH (do not install near a humidifier)  
Acceptable Environment  
Temperature 10 32°C (50 89.6°F)  
Humidity 15 80% RH (do not install near a humidifier)  
10  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation, Move and Disposal of the Machine  
Location  
Allow enough space around the machine for smooth fax or copy operation, and  
servicing by a service representative.  
Front: 70cm (2.3ft.)  
Back: 0cm (0.0 in.)  
Left side: 0cm (0.0 in.)  
Note  
A working space of at least 30cm (1.0ft.) is necessary to install the optional  
Bypass Tray Unit, clear jammed paper, or replace the toner cartridge.  
Right: 5cm (2.0 in.)  
Note  
A working space of at least 5cm (2.0 in.) is necessary to send 11"×17" size  
documents by fax or install the optional Printer Interface.  
10  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Connecting the Power and Switching On  
R WARNING:  
Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-  
tension cord.  
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the  
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,  
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:  
You spill something into the machine.  
You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.  
The external housing of your machine has been damaged.  
R CAUTION:  
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the  
plug (not the cable).  
A Plug in the cable to the outlet.  
B Turn the power switch on.  
10  
Important  
Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10%.  
The supply from the outlet must not fluctuate more than 12V above or be-  
low 120V.  
The power cord should not be laid where it might trip somebody.  
Do not place anything on the power cord.  
If you must use an extension cord, make sure that it is capable of carrying  
120V / 8A, and that your facsimile terminal is the only piece of equipment  
connected to that cord.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation, Move and Disposal of the Machine  
Moving the Machine  
R CAUTION:  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.  
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not  
be damaged under the machine.  
If you are moving the machine to a distant location such as another floor or  
building, contact your service representative. Note that the moving service is  
a paid service.  
If the distance to the new location is short, move the machine yourself, follow-  
ing the precautions described below.  
Make sure that the memory level indicated on the display is 100% before  
unplugging the power cord.  
Make sure to unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet by holding  
the power plug.  
Make sure to close the ADF cover, ADF unit, and side cover.  
Make sure to move the machine carefully, keeping the machine horizontal  
at all times. Shaking the machine or tilting it to a large degree may cause  
the machine to malfunction.  
After changing the location of the machine, check the contents of the follow-  
rect, register the correct information again.  
If the fax number is changed  
Own Fax Number See p.55 Own Name/Fax Header/Own Fax Number,  
<Basic Features>, p.189 G3 Analog Line, and p.202 Transfer Report.  
If the Own Name such as company name is changed  
Fax Header See p.55 Own Name/Fax Header/Own Fax Number, <Basic  
Features>.  
10  
Disposing of the Machine  
Contact your service representative when you wish to dispose of the machine.  
R WARNING:  
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer.  
R CAUTION:  
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended  
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place  
at an authorized dealer.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Connecting to a Telephone Line  
Connecting to the Telephone Line  
Connecting the Machine to the  
Telephone Line  
R CAUTION:  
To reduce the risk of fire, use  
only No. 26 AWG or larger tele-  
communication line cord.  
R ATTENTION:  
Pour réduire le risque d'incendie,  
utiliser uniquement des conduc-  
teurs de télécommunications 26  
AWG ou de section supérieure.  
1. Or the optional Handset  
Important  
To connect the machine to a tele-  
phone line, use a snap-in modular  
type connector.  
By law in the United States, you  
must program your phone number  
identification (your Own Fax  
Number) into your machine before  
you can connect the public phone  
system. See p.55 Own Name/Fax  
Header/Own Fax Number, <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
Connector Location  
Do not connect the G3 analog line  
to the G4 socket.  
Note  
Connect the optional Handset or  
external telephone to the "TEL1"  
socket.  
10  
1. LINE1: Telephone line connec-  
tion  
2. TEL1: For the optional handset or  
external telephone  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting to a Telephone Line  
Connecting to an Additional  
G3 Line  
ISDN  
You can connect to ISDN by installing  
the optional ISDN Unit. Connect the  
ISDN cable that comes with the ISDN  
Unit to the "ISDN" socket.  
You can connect the machine to two  
G3 lines by installing the optional Ex-  
tra G3 Interface Unit. Connect the ad-  
ditional G3 line to the "LINE2" socket.  
Important  
Contact your local service repre-  
sentative when connecting to IS-  
DN.  
Important  
Contact your service representa-  
tive when connecting to the addi-  
tional G3 line.  
Connecting Location  
Connecting Location  
Connecting an External  
Telephone  
You can connect an external tele-  
phone as well as the optional Handset  
to the machine to make or receive  
calls.  
10  
Note  
Depending on the type of external  
telephone, it cannot be connected  
or some of its functions are not  
available.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Connecting the Optional  
Handset  
Setting up the Optional Handset  
Selecting the line type  
Set the line type switch to the ap-  
propriate position.  
Installing the Optional Handset  
Tone Dialing: TT  
Pulse Dialing: DP  
A Fix the handset holder to the man-  
ual pocket using an item such as a  
small coin.  
TT  
DP  
Important  
Do not screw in screws too  
tightly. Doing so may damage  
the handset holder or manual  
pocket.  
ND1X00E0  
Adjusting the ringing tone volume  
Adjust the ringing tone volume us-  
ing the volume switch on the  
handset as shown below.  
Ringer  
1. Handset holder  
3
6
9
2
5
8
1
2. Manual pocket  
0
4
7
B Place the handset on the handset  
holder, and feed the handset cord  
through the center of the manual  
pocket.  
ND1X00E1  
10  
Adjusting the receiver volume  
Adjust the receiver volume with  
the volume switch on the handset  
as shown below.  
C Plug the handset jack into the  
"TEL1" socket.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Supplies  
Supplies  
Toner Cartridge  
One toner cartridge can print approximately 10,000 sheets (ITU-T #1Chart).  
Product Name  
Color  
Purchase Unit  
Toner Cartridge  
Black  
1 pack  
Maintenance Units  
The ADF maintenance kit should be replaced after feeding approximately  
30,000 sheets of originals.  
The fusing maintenance unit should be replaced after printing approximately  
60,000 sheets of paper.  
Product Name  
Content  
Purchase Unit  
ADF Maintenance Kit  
Feed unit  
1 box  
Separation corona  
Fusing Maintenance Unit  
Fusing unit  
Transfer roller  
Gloves  
1 box  
Stamp Cartridge  
One stamp cartridge can stamp approximately 3,000 times.  
Product Name  
Color  
Purchase Unit  
1 pack (4 pieces)  
Stamp Cartridge  
Pink  
10  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Options  
40MB Memory Card  
Following features are enhanced when you install the Optional 40MB Memory  
Card:  
Increasing the number of documents that you can store in the machine's  
memory  
Using the TX/RX File Save function (necessary to install Optional Function  
Upgrade Unit)  
Setting the Resolution to Extra Super Fine when copying, and printing the re-  
ceived messages  
Optional 40MB Memory Card  
You can expand the memory size from the standard 7MB to 40MB. The num-  
ber of documents that you can store in the machine's memory increases to ap-  
proximately 1,200 sheets. *1  
*1  
Assuming that the standard originals are stored with the following settings: Res-  
olution "Standard", Density "Standard", Halftone "OFF".  
Limitation  
You cannot install the Optional 40MB Memory Card and optional Fax On De-  
mand Unit at the same time.  
Note  
The Optional 40MB Memory Card must be installed by a service representa-  
tive.  
10  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Options  
Function Upgrade Unit  
Optional Function Upgrade Unit enables you to use the TX/RX File Save func-  
tion. (It is necessary to install the Optional 40MB Memory Card at the same  
time.) The unit also expands the functions listed below.  
Function  
Without Function Upgrade  
Unit  
Function Upgrade Unit  
Installed  
Box  
150 Boxes  
400 Boxes  
Group  
9 Groups  
30 Groups  
Memory Transmission  
Auto Document  
Programming  
1,200 Sheets of Originals*1  
3,000 Sheets of Originals*1  
244 Documents  
244  
144 Documents  
144  
250  
Communication Record in  
Memory  
1,000  
Speed Dial  
100 Destinations  
Not Available  
1,000 Destinations  
Available*1  
TX/RX File Save  
The Optional 40MB Memory Card is necessary.*1  
Fax On Demand Unit  
The optional Fax On Demand Unit enables you to use the fax information ser-  
vice.  
Limitation  
You cannot install the optional Fax On Demand Unit and Optional 40MB  
Memory Card at the same time. You cannot use the two options alternately  
by replacing one with the other.  
Note  
The optional Fax On Demand Unit must be installed by a service representa-  
10  
tive.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Extra G3 Interface Unit  
The optional Extra G3 Interface Unit enables you to connect the machine to an-  
other G3 line in addition to the standard connection to a G3 line.  
ISDN Unit  
You can connect to ISDN and use the functions listed below by installing the op-  
tional ISDN Unit.  
Function  
Sub-address  
UUI  
Reference  
p.82 Sub-address”  
p.83 UUI”  
Handset  
Handset  
You can make or receive calls by installing the optional Handset and dialing  
manually (See p.88 Manual Dial).  
NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1)  
The NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1) enables you to send fax messages as e-  
mail to another fax machine or send them to a personal computer. You can also  
receive such e-mail from another fax machine.  
The NIC FAX Unit (Option for Type1) enables you to connect the machine to a  
LAN environment and use the following functions:  
Internet Fax Function  
Enables you to send or receive fax messages as e-mail through the Internet.  
The other end must be a fax machine of the same model or compatible to  
TIFF-F format. Your machine can also receive fax messages sent as e-mail, or  
send them to a personal computer.  
10  
IP-Fax Function  
Enables message transmission and reception between fax machines that are  
directly connected to a network that uses TCP/IP.  
LAN FAX Function  
Enables you to send a document made using a PC application software from  
your machine to other fax machines through a telephone line. Your machine  
must be connected to a PC through a LAN network.  
Scanner Function  
Enables you to scan documents and send them to a folder in a network server  
such as ScanRouter V2 Lite server or send it as an attachment to an e-mail.  
Scanning in color is also possible.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Options  
Note  
Type2 is equipped with the NIC FAX Unit in standard.  
Reference  
See NIC FAX Unit manual for detailed information.  
Printer Interface Unit  
The Printer Interface enables you to connect the machine to a personal computer  
and use it as a printer. It also enables you to connect the machine to a LAN en-  
vironment and use it as a network printer.  
Reference  
See the Optional Printer Interface Unit manual for detailed information.  
Other Options  
Optional Paper Tray Unit  
You can load up to 500 sheets of 81/2"×11" LK or 81/2"×14" L size paper  
(Adjustable to A3 L, A4 LK, and A5K). You can use the Specified Tray  
function by installing the optional Paper Tray Unit. See p.220 Specified  
Tray).  
Optional Bypass Tray Unit  
You can load paper of standard sizes such as A3 L, B4 L, A4 L, 11"×17" L,  
81/2"×14" L, and 81/2"×11" LK.  
You can also use custom size paper of 100 to 297mm (3.9 to 11.7 in.) in width  
and 148 to 432mm (5.8 to 17.0 in.) in length when making copies or using the  
machine as a printer.  
You can load paper up to 100 sheets (81/2"×11" or smaller size) or 10 sheets  
(larger than 81/2"×11" size).  
Optional Counter Unit  
This is a tamper-proof mechanical counter whose reading cannot be changed  
by the user.  
10  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Specifications  
Power supply:  
120V, 60Hz  
Power consumption *1 :  
Energy Saver Mode:  
Average 2W or less (Type1)  
Average 6W or less (Type2)  
Average 30W or less  
Average 45W or less  
Average 450W or less  
Maximum 1000W  
Standby Mode:  
Transmission:  
Reception:  
Copying:  
Average 400W or less  
Maximum 1000W  
*1  
When no Option is installed.  
Noise Emission  
Sound Power Level  
Mainframe Only  
63 db(A) or less  
64 db(A) or less  
40 db(A) or less  
During Printing  
During Coyping  
Standby  
Sound Pressure Level *1  
Mainframe Only  
57 db(A) or less  
During Printing  
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual val-  
ues.  
10  
*1  
It is measured at the position of the operator.  
Protocol:  
G3, G4 (optional ISDN Unit required)  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Specifications  
Transmission time:  
G3: Less than 3 seconds at 33,600 bps (JBIG coding)  
G4: Less than 2 seconds at 64 kbps (MMR coding)  
Note  
The values above are measured when sending an A4 size original with  
standard resolution (G3: 8×3.85 lines/mm (200×100dpi) with JBIG coding,  
G4: 200×100dpi with MMR coding) with Memory Transmission. They in-  
dicate the time spent on transmission, and do not include the time spent on  
communication control. The actual transmission time varies depending on  
the type of original, make of fax machine on the other end, and condition  
of the telephone line.  
Data compression:  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Modulation method  
Message Modem  
Protocol Modem  
V.34, V.17, V.29, V.27ter (G3), V.33 (G3 non-standard)  
V.21, V.8 (G3)  
Transmission speed:  
G3:  
33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/  
9,600/7,200/4,800/2,400 bps.  
G4: 64 kbps/56 kbps  
Scanning resolution:  
G3  
Standard: 8×3.85 lines/mm (200×100dpi)  
Detail: 8×7.7 lines/mm (200×200dpi)  
Fine: 8×15.4 lines/mm (200×400dpi)  
Super Fine: 16×15.4 lines/mm (400×400dpi)  
Extra Super Fine: 24×23.1 lines/mm (600×600dpi) (Optional 40MB Memo-  
ry Card required when in reception)  
G4  
10  
Standard: 200×100dpi  
Detail: 200×200dpi  
Super Fine: 400×400dpi  
Extra Super Fine: 600×600dpi (Optional 40MB Memory Card required  
when in reception)  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Copying  
Standard: 200×100dpi  
Detail: 200×200dpi  
Super Fine: 400×400dpi  
Extra Super Fine: 600×600dpi (Optional 40MB Memory Card required)  
Reference  
Chapter 9, "Specifications" in the NIC FAX Unit manual  
Print Process  
Printing on standard paper using the laser  
Dimensions (Width×Depth×Height):  
Type1: 505×609×615mm (19.9×24.0×24.2 in.)  
Type2: 505×609×480mm (19.9×24.0×18.9 in.)  
Weight:  
Type1: 40.5kg (89.2 lb.) or less  
Type2: 28.6kg (63.0 lb.) or less  
Acceptable Types of Originals  
Make sure your originals are completely dry before placing them in the machine.  
Originals containing wet ink or correcting fluid will mark the scanner and affect  
the resulting image.  
Acceptable Original Sizes  
Where Original is  
Placed  
Acceptable Original Maximum Number  
Size of Sheets  
Paper Thickness  
Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF)  
Maximum:  
304×600mm  
(12.0×23.6 in.)  
Minimum:  
148×105mm  
(5.8 ×4.1 in.)  
11"×17" 30 sheets  
6090g/m2, 16 to 24  
lb. paper  
(0.05 to 0.2mm)  
81/2"×14" 40 sheets  
81/2"×11" 75 sheets  
10  
Original Bypass Tray  
Maximum:  
304×1200mm  
(12.0×47.2 in.)  
Minimum:  
148×105mm  
(5.8×4.1in.)  
1 sheet  
50120g/m2,13 to 32  
lb. paper  
(0.050.3mm)  
Note  
When making a copy or sending a fax message of an original whose length  
exceeds 11"×17" size, set the original on the original bypass tray one sheet at  
a time, supporting it with your hand.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Paper Size and Scanned Area  
5mm  
(0.2")  
4mm  
(0.2")  
5mm  
(0.2")  
Feeding direction  
Document width  
148~304mm  
(5.8"-12.0")  
4mm  
(0.2")  
Document length  
105~1,200mm  
(4.1"-47.2")  
GFGYOM0N  
The part shaded will not be scanned, because it is outside the maximum scan-  
ning width range.  
Note  
Images at the edges of the original document (top 5mm (0.2 in.), bottom 4mm  
(0.2 in.), left 4mm (0.2 in.), right 5mm (0.2 in.)) may not be scanned even if you  
set a standard sized original properly.  
There may be some difference in size between the image scanned by your ma-  
chine and the image printed at the receiving end.  
If the width of paper loaded in the other party's fax machine is smaller than  
that of your original, your document image is automatically reduced to fit the  
loaded paper at the time of transmission. See p.93 Auto Reduction”  
When scanning an original, the machine detects the size of the original in the  
following manner. When the original is set on the automatic document feeder  
(ADF), the machine scans the original and if that original's width is less than  
approximately 230mm (9.1 in.), it assumes that the original is 81/2"×11" or  
81/2"×14" size width. And if the width is between 242mm (9.5 in.) and 261mm  
(10.3 in.), it assumes the original to be B4 size, and 274mm (10.8 in.) or more,  
11"×17" size width. The length of scanning range varies depending on this  
size judgement, and the maximum is 600mm (23.6 in.).  
10  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Paper  
It is recommended that you use your supplier's paper for the best printing re-  
sults.  
You can use paper of equivalent thickness to your supplier's paper.  
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types  
The recommended sizes, types and sheets of paper that you can load in the ma-  
chine are described below.  
Important  
Follow the precautions listed below when storing paper.  
Avoid storing it in direct sunlight.  
Store it in a dry place (humidity 70% or lower).  
Store it on a level surface.  
Once you open a package, store the remaining sheets in a plastic bag so  
that the paper does not absorb moisture.  
Paper that has absorbed moisture is often curled and may cause paper jams.  
Load this kind of paper face down.  
Where Paper is Paper Sizes  
Loaded  
Paper Capacity  
Paper Type  
Main Paper  
Tray  
81/2"×11" LK or 81/2"×14"L (Ad- 500 sheets  
Ordinary high  
quality paper  
(6090g/m2, 16 to  
24lb.)  
justable to A3L, A4L, 11"×17"L  
250 sheets  
(11"×17"L)  
81/4"×13"L, 8"×13"L)  
Optional Paper 81/2"×11" LK or 81/2"×14" L (Ad- 500 sheets  
Tray Unit  
justable to A3 L, A4 LK, and  
A5K)  
OptionalBypass Standard size: A3 L, B4 L, A4 L,  
81/2"×11" or  
smaller: 100  
sheets  
Ordinary high  
quality paper  
(6090g/m2,  
16 to 24 lb.)  
Tray Unit  
11"×17" L, 81/2"×14" L, and  
81/2"×11" LK Custom size: Width  
100 to 297mm (3.9 to 11.7 in.),  
Length 148 to 432mm (5.8 to 17.0 in.)  
10  
Larger than  
81/2"×11": 10  
sheets  
OHP trans-  
parencies  
Postcard: 40  
sheets  
Adhesive la-  
bel  
Postcards  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Note  
You can load only custom sized paper to the optional Bypass Tray Unit when  
making copies or using the PC Printing function (option).  
Load OHP transparencies to the optional Bypass Tray Unit one sheet at a  
time, and remove it from the paper tray immediately after the copying is com-  
plete.  
Load postcards in landscape orientation (L) in the optional Bypass Tray  
Unit.  
Non-recommended Paper  
Do not use the paper listed below. Using these kinds of paper may cause paper  
jams.  
Curled, wavy, creased or dog-eared paper  
Torn paper  
Paper with holes  
Paper with an unsmooth surface  
Paper with an slippery surface  
Thin and soft paper  
Important  
The printed image may not be clear if the surface of the paper is rough.  
Do not use any paper with coating, such as thermo-sensitive paper, art paper,  
aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper. Using such paper may re-  
sult in malfunction.  
10  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Energy Saving  
Introduction  
When your fax machine prints fax messages, it uses heat to fix the image on pa-  
per. This heat is generated using a heating roller which must be hot enough to  
fuse toner to the paper properly. Because keeping the roller hot all the time con-  
sumes electricity, this machine is provided with an Energy Saver Mode in which  
the heating roller is heated to full temperature only when a message needs to be  
printed.  
Two available types of Energy Saver Mode are described in the table below.  
Energy Saver Mode  
Machine status in  
How long before  
Power consumption  
Energy Saver Mode  
you can print after in Energy Saver  
exiting Energy  
Saver Mode  
Mode *1  
Fax Standby (Heater  
half- cool)  
The message "Cur-  
rently the ma-  
chine is in  
Within about 35  
seconds  
Type1: 30W  
Type2: 30W  
Energy Saver  
Mode." appears on the  
display. The machine  
maintains the heater in  
the preheated mode.  
Energy Saving Stand- The message "Cur-  
Within about 52  
seconds  
Type1: 2W *2  
Type2: 6W *3  
by (Heater off)  
rently the ma-  
chine is in  
Energy Saver  
Mode." appears on the  
display. The power of the  
heater is turned off.  
*1 When options are not installed.  
*2 3.5W when the Optional ISDN Unit is installed. 6W when the NIC FAX Unit  
(Option for Type1) is installed.  
*3 7.5W when Optional ISDN Unit is installed.  
10  
Values vary according to options installed and settings of User Parameters.  
In Energy Saving Standby mode, letting the heating roller cool to room temper-  
ature will reduce the amount of electricity the fax machine consumes. However,  
the fax machine will not print incoming messages right away, it will store them  
in memory and print them out after the roller warms up.  
In Fax Standby mode, letting the heating roller cool halfway reduces the amount  
of electricity the fax machine consumes, but not as much as letting it cool to room  
temperature. On the other hand, since warming up takes only a short time, in-  
coming fax messages can be printed right away.  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Note  
You can still send fax messages stored in memory while the machine is in En-  
ergy Saver Mode.  
Even in Energy Saving Standby mode, indicators that blink or light during  
communication or reception still work. When the Substitute Reception, Mem-  
ory Lock or Confidential message indicator lights, exit Energy Saver Mode  
and take appropriate action.  
You can specify High Temperature Standby mode in combination with either  
Energy Saver Standby mode or Fax Standby mode. If High Temperature  
Standby mode is turned on, the machine starts a new print job in less time  
than the wait time described in the table above, provided it is initiated within  
the time specified with User Parameters (switch 31 bits 7,6) after the previous  
print job is complete. You can make necessary settings with User Parameters.  
See p.178 User Parameters(switch 05 bit 3).  
You can specify the duration of time before the machine exits High Temper-  
ature Standby mode with User Parameters. See p.178 User Parameters”  
(switch 31 bits 7,6).  
While the Night Timer is activated, the machine stays in the Energy Saver  
Standby mode. If a fax message comes in while the heater is turned off, it is  
stored in the machine's memory (Substitute Reception), and printed after the  
specified time is reached. See p.176 Night Timer.  
Entering Energy Saver Mode  
The machine enters Energy Saver Mode when:  
Nobody uses the machine for about 5 minutes.  
The user holds down the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key for about 2 seconds.  
Note  
If you wish to change the five minute period to one or three minutes, or if you  
do not want your machine to enter the Energy Saver Mode automatically,  
please contact your service representative.  
10  
-When the machine does not enter Energy Saver Mode  
The machine does not enter Energy Saver Mode when:  
The optional Handset is not placed correctly  
The main paper tray is not loaded into the machine  
Either the ADF unit, ADF cover or the side cover is open.  
An original is jammed  
The machine is out of order  
There is no paper loaded into either the main paper tray or the optional Paper  
Tray Unit  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Exiting Energy Saver Mode  
Your machine exits Energy Saver Mode when a fax is received.  
To exit Energy Saver Mode manually:  
In Energy Saving Standby mode, press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key.  
In Fax Standby mode, press any key.  
Place an original.  
Pick up the optional Handset.  
Pull out the main paper tray.  
Open the ADF unit or ADF cover.  
Open the side cover.  
Selecting the Energy Saver Mode type  
To select the Energy Saver Mode type, adjust the bit switch below with User Pa-  
rameters. See p.178 User Parameters(switch 05 bit 6).  
Switch 05 Bit 6  
Energy Saving Standby: To let the heating roller cool to room temperature,  
set bit 6 to 0.  
Fax Standby: To let the heating roller cool halfway set bit 6 to 1.  
Reception in Energy Saver Mode  
Once in Energy Saver Mode, you can still receive messages. When a message is  
received, the machine prints it and returns to Energy Saver Mode.  
10  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maximum Values  
Maximum Values  
The following table describes the maximum value for each item.  
Item  
Standard  
With options  
installed  
Memory  
7MB  
40MB  
The number of pages that you can store in  
memory (Using ITU-T #1Chart, Resolution:  
Standard, Original Type: Halftone Off)  
approximately 560  
pages  
approximately 1,200 *1  
/3,000 pages *2  
Total number of Memory Transmission files  
500  
250  
The number of destinations you can specify  
for one file  
Total number of destinations that you can  
specify for all files  
500  
2,000  
The number of Quick Dials you can register  
The number of Speed Dials you can register  
The number of Group Dials you can register  
144  
100  
9
1,000 *3  
30 *3  
The number of destinations you can specify by 100  
the number keys  
1,000 *3  
The number of destinations you can register in 250  
a Group  
The number of programs you can register  
144  
244 *3 (100 files are reg-  
istered to Speed Dial  
codes.)  
The number of User Codes you can register  
The number of digits for Dials  
150  
254  
144  
400 *3  
The number of Auto Document files  
244 *3 (100 files are reg-  
istered to Speed Dial  
codes.)  
10  
The number of communication results that can 250  
be displayed  
1,000  
The number of communication records that  
you can store in memory  
250  
1,000  
The number of Specified Senders you can reg- 50  
ister or add  
*1  
When the Optional 40MB Memory Card is installed  
*2  
When the Optional 40MB Memory Card and optional Function Upgrade Unit are in-  
stalled  
*3  
When the optional Function Upgrade Unit is installed  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
INDEX  
Cleaning the Registration Roller, 279  
Communication Failure Report, 103, 108  
Communication Information, 35  
Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission), 107  
Communication Result Report  
(Polling Reception), 21  
Confidential File Report, 47  
Confidential ID, 199  
Connecting the Power and Switching On, 284  
Connecting to a Telephone Line, 286  
Copying, 127  
A
Accessing the Key Operator Tools, 171  
Adjusting the Display Contrast, 151  
Adjusting the Printing Density, 124  
Authorized Reception, 217  
Authorized Reception, Setup, 218  
Auto Discriminate, 91  
Auto Document, 99  
Automatic Redial, 105  
Auto Reduction, 93  
B
Counters, 134  
Backup File Transmission, 102  
Backup File Transmission Settings, 243  
Batch Original Documents Transmission, 96  
Batch Transmission, 105  
Blank Sheet Detect, 101  
Box File Manager Functions, 67  
Box Settings, 245  
Broadcasting  
Checking Progress, 104  
Broadcasting Sequence, 104  
Date/Time, 151  
Deleting a Keystroke Program, 143  
Deleting an Auto Document, 147  
Deleting Entries, 209  
Deleting Fax On Demand Documents, 162  
Deleting Files, 66  
Deleting forwarding addresses, 228  
Deleting Information Boxes, 253  
Deleting Information Box Messages, 71  
Deleting Personal Boxes, 250  
Deleting Specified Senders, 216, 219, 223,  
236, 239  
Deleting Transfer Boxes, 258  
Disk File Search List, 65  
Disk File Visual List, 65  
C
Canceling a Transmission or Reception, 35  
Center Mark, 120  
Chain Dial, 75  
Changing  
Paper Size, 269, 271, 273  
Displaying the Files in Memory, 56  
Display Language, 135  
Document Feeder  
Changing a destination, 41  
Changing the Transmission Time, 40  
Checkered Mark, 120  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files, 35  
Checking and Editing a File, 38  
Checking Destinations (Destination List), 39  
Checking the Transmission Result, 103  
Checking the Transmission Result  
(TX Status), 44  
Acceptable originals, 296  
Dual Access, 105  
Duplex Original Settings, 94  
ECM (Error Correction Mode), 105  
Economy Transmission, 175  
End Receiver, 28, 114  
Energy Saving, 300  
Error Codes, 265  
Cleaning the Copy Paper Transport  
Mechanism, 277  
Cleaning the Document Transport  
Mechanism, 275  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
F
Fax Header, 32  
Fax Mode (Auto Receive Mode), 113  
Fax On Demand, 160  
Fax On Demand Recorded Messages, 166  
Fax Reset Timer, 152  
Key Layout, 205  
Key Operator Settings, 171  
Keystroke Program, 139  
Keystroke Program List, 149  
File Reserve Report  
(Memory Transmission), 107  
File Reserve Report (Polling Reception), 21  
File Retention, 201  
Forwarding, 223  
Forwarding Mark, 224  
Label, 98  
Label Insertion, 98  
Language Selection, 135  
Loading Paper, 267  
Free Polling Transmission, 22, 23  
G
Machine Environment, 281  
Maintaining, 267  
Manual Dial, 88  
Manuals for This Machine, 3  
Memory Card, 290  
Memory File Transfer, 207  
Memory Lock, 233  
Memory Lock ID, 199  
Memory Reception, 110  
More Transmission Functions, 103  
Multi-copy Reception, 120, 214  
Multi-step Transfer, 115  
G3, 90  
G3 Analog Line, 189  
G3 Digital Line, 192  
G4, 91  
G4 Digital Line, 194  
General, 109  
Group Dial List, 149  
H
Handset  
Installation, 288  
Handy Dialing Functions, 75  
I
Network Settings, 204  
Night Timer, 176  
No Document, No Dial, 100  
ID Override Polling Transmission, 23  
ID Reception, 119  
ID Transmission, 94  
Noise Emission, 294  
Image Rotation, 122  
O
Immediate Reception, 109  
Immediate Transmission Result Report, 103  
Information Boxes, 251  
On Hook Dial, 85  
On Hook Timer, 153  
Other Transmission Features, 75  
Output density, 124  
IP-Fax Parameter Settings, 204  
J
Jams, Clearing, 261  
JBIG Reception, 119  
JBIG Transmission, 102  
Journal, 50, 53, 149  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
PABX, 91  
Quick Dial List, 149  
Page Separation and Length Reduction, 123  
Paper, 267, 268  
Paper Specifications, 298  
Parallel Memory Transmission, 105  
Personal Boxes, 246  
Polling ID, 199  
Polling Reception, 19  
Polling Transmission, 22  
Polling Transmission Clear Report, 25  
Power, 284  
Printed Reports, 107  
Printing  
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 212  
Reception Features, 109  
Reception Functions, 114  
Reception Time, 121  
Redial, 77  
Reduced Image Transmission, 26  
Registering Auto Document, 145  
Registering/Editing Fax On Demand  
Documents, 160  
Registering/Editing Information Boxes, 251  
Registering/Editing Personal Boxes, 247  
Registering/Editing Transfer Boxes, 255  
Registering ID Codes, 199  
Remote Transfer, 116  
Center Mark, 120  
Checkered Mark, 120  
Printing a Confidential Message, 46  
Printing a List of Files in Memory  
(Print TX File List), 43  
Printing a Memory-locked Message, 48  
Printing a Stored Message, 37  
Printing Fax On Demand Documents, 164  
Printing Files, 65  
Printing Functions, 120  
Printing Information Box Messages, 70  
Printing Options  
Remote Transfer with UUI, 118  
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge, 280  
Reports, 103  
Error Report, 264  
Power Failure Report, 264  
Reading Reports, 264  
Reports/Lists, 149  
Requesting Party, 28, 114  
Re-sending a file, 40  
Reset PM Counter, 211  
Rotate Sort, 122  
Center Mark, 120  
Checkered Mark, 120  
CIL Print, 123  
TID Print, 124  
TSI Print, 123  
Printing Personal Box Messages, 67  
Printing the Box List, 259  
Printing the Fax On Demand Access  
Report, 165  
Printing the Fax On Demand List, 165  
Printing the Journal, 50, 53  
Printing the Specified Sender List, 217,  
220, 223, 236, 239, 241  
Print Position, 206  
Program/Delete, 136  
Programming and Changing an Auto  
Document, 145  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Scanner Cleaning Message, 101  
Scanning area, 297  
Telephone Directory, 76  
Telephone Mode, 113  
Searching Memory for Received Faxes, 62  
Searching Memory for Sent Faxes, 59  
Secured ID Override Polling  
Transmission, 22  
Toner saving, 124  
Transfer Boxes, 254  
Transfer Report, 202  
Transfer Request, 28  
Secured Polling Reception, 19, 20  
Secured Polling Transmission, 22, 23  
Selecting the Line, 89  
Selecting the Reception Mode, 113  
Sending a Fax Immediately, 104  
Sending Confidential Messages, 7  
Send Later, 5  
Transfer Result Report, 115  
Transfer Station, 28, 114  
Transmission Features, 93  
Transmission Mode, 5  
Transmission Result Report, 108  
TTI Fax Header Print, 32  
Two In One, 121  
SEP Code Polling Reception, 16  
SEP Code Polling Transmission, 80  
Setting up Forwarding, 225  
Setting up Memory Lock, 234  
Setting up Multi-copy Reception, 214  
Setting up Specified Tray, 221  
Setting up TX/RX File Save, 237  
Setup, 151  
TX/RX File Save, 58  
TX/RX File Save Settings, 236  
User Code Transmission, 10  
User Function Keys, 154  
User Parameter List, 179  
User Parameters, 178  
UUI, 83  
Simultaneous Broadcast, 104  
Solving Operation Problems, 261  
Specifications, 294  
Specified Tray, 220  
Specifying an End Receiver, 31  
Speed Dial List, 149  
Stamp, 93  
Stored ID Override Polling Reception, 19, 20  
Storing and Changing Keystroke  
Programs, 139  
Storing Messages in Information Boxes, 69  
Sub-address, 82  
SUB Code Transmission, 78  
SUB Code Transmission with the Mode Key, 13  
Substitute Reception, 111  
Switches and Bits, 178  
System Parameter Transmission, 204  
System Settings, 175  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
308  
UE USA H310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Q See Security Camera QR424 411 User Guide
RCA CRT Television 15634620 User Guide
Regency Indoor Fireplace H15 User Guide
Rio Audio Mouse 41000855 004_B User Guide
Runco Projector PFP 11 User Guide
Samson Musical Instrument Amplifier Acoustic Pre Amp User Guide
Samsung Digital Camera EC DV300FBPB User Guide
Samsung Home Theater System HT TWZ315 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television DP19640 User Guide
Sceptre Technologies Flat Panel Television X320 User Guide